You are on page 1of 329

GE Medical Systems fc3004 Siemens Plus 4 Modality: CT

1.
Alignment and Calibration
Siemens Plus 4
Component Locations

Error Codes

Functional Checks

Logic/Block Diagrams

Preventive Maintenance

Software and Diagnostics

Theory

Troubleshooting

This program and its contents are RESTRICTED to GE Medical Systems and How to Use this Tool
approved licensees. For GE Medical Systems and approved licensee personnel
only. If you are not a GE Medical Systems or approved licensee employee,
you must close this application immediately. Disclosure to third parties prohibited. Self-paced Training Modules
GES-produced documents are not intended for use as documentation for field-
based diagnostic imaging equipment. Copyright GE Medical Systems 2002. Reference Materials

Feedback to Author

Personal Notes
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Alignment and Calibration

Tube Replacement Tube Voltage


Required Procedures for Tune Up and Changes Filament Adaptation
Gantry Tilt Z-Monitor Calibration (ZmonCal)
Slice Thickness Selection Light Marker Separation (LIMA)
Patient Table Adjustments Tabgen
Horizontal Feed Accuracy (Table Top Calibration) Channel Error Correction (CCR)
Top Support Calibration Difference Calibration (DiffCal)
Vertical Table Movement (PHSVert) Calibration Center Channel (BeamCent)
Getter (Season) the Tube Beam Hardening Correction
Detector Diaphragm (DetDia) Base Calibration (BaseCal)
How to Adjust Detector Limit Switches Water Scaling (Scaling)
Z-Position of Tube Diaphragm (Z-Adjust) UFC Detector Spacing Correction
X-ray Alignment (Check Ali) Save Tables
Detector Tilt (DetTilt) Alignment (DetAli) Video Monitor Adjustments
Dosis Monitor Position Image Orientation Correction
Z-Monitor Position Audio Adjustments
Focus Alignment WCS Adjustments

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

How to Remove the X-ray Tube


1) Put tube at the 6 o’clock position.
2) Disconnect X4, X5, X6 and anode ground from X-ray tube.
3) Disconnect the HV cables from the Damping Resistors.
4) Place an oil absorber under cooling hoses, then rotate connectors both toward region between them to
loosen.
5) Position the cover from the tube shipping box over the cable duct between the gantry and table so that it can
can receive the old tube into it.
6) Install the X-ray Tube handle.
7) Press S1 in the PDS.
8) Place the tube replace pad and belt on the end of the cradle and feed into gantry.
9) Wrap the belt onto the handle.
10) Remove the four M10 Allen bolts that hold the tube.
11) Feed the cradle and tube out of the gantry.
12) Lower the table until the tube is lying in the shipping box. Use the S701 - S703 switches.
13) Remove the belt and secure the tube in its box.
14) Move the old tube and its box away from the scanner.
15) Go to How to Install the X-ray Tube

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

How to Install the X-ray Tube


1) Verify S1 is activated in the PDS.
2) Place the new tube between the gantry and table.
3) Install the X-ray Tube handle on the new tube.
4) Release the new tube from its box and attach the belt that’s on the cradle to the handle.
5) Feed and raise the cradle and tube into position in the gantry.
6) Install the four M10 Allen bolts that hold the tube. Use 90 Nm of torque.
7) Reconnect the cooling hoses.
8) Remove protective covers and attach HV connectors into Damping Resistors. Use new silicon washers,
rings and liquid silicon.
9) Reconnect the tube cables.
10) Reinstall new cable ties.
11) Go to the Alignment and Cal table. Perform the procedures X’ed under the Tube column in the order listed.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Required Procedures for Tune Up and System Changes


PROCEDURE SERVICE PROGRAM TUNE Tube Collim SliceTH Detector Intrg. Bd
Adapt system to line voltage and frequency Sys Man Reg.3 pg.5-1 X
Check System Configuration/Enter New Ser.No. System/Config X X X X
Check gantry tilt X
Load X-ray tube tables TubeToolkit X
Load Collimator Parameters X
Select slice thickness System/Run/Slice X
Adjust horizontal table movement Adjust/PHSHoriz X
Adjust vertical table movement Adjust/PHSVer X
Getter (Season) the X-ray tube Adjust/Getter X X
Adjust detector diaphragm Adjust/DetDia X X
Adjust collimator Z-Position Adjust/Zadjust X X X X
Check beam alignment Adjust/CheckAli X
Adjust detector alignment Adjust/DetAli X X X
Check Dosis Monitor and Z Monitor positions Both Dosis Dosis Z only
Adjust focus alignment Adjust/FocusAli X X X
Set tube voltage and current Adjust/Voltage X X X X X
Calibrate Z-Monitor (located on detector) Adjust/ZmonCa X X X X X
Align laser light markers Adjust/LightM X
Generate channel correction table Tabgen/CCR X X X X
Generate difference calibration table Tabgen/DiffCa X X X X X
Determine center channel (Image Homogeneity) Tabgen/BeamCent X X X X
Correct beam hardening (Image Homogeneity) Tabgen/BeamHard X X X X
Perform water scaling Tabgen/Scaling X X X X X
Generate Base Calibration Table Tabgen/BaseCal X
If UFC detector, perform Spacing Correction Tabgen/Spacing X
Quality Constancy Test Scan Setup/Quality X X X X X X
Save Tables System/Run X X X X X X

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Gantry Tilt PROCEDURE TABLE

Verify whether tilt is OK


8) Tilt the gantry to the 0 degree position.
9) Check whether the gantry is exactly vertical with the level. If it is not, adjust the tilt sensor.
10) Tilt the gantry +30 degrees and -30 degrees. If both end positions can be reached without hitting any
mechanical end stop, you don't have to do the following adjustment.
When tilt limits need adjustment
1) Remove the upper and lower covers on the left gantry side.
2) Remove the cover from the MCU-RTC (D301) board.
3) Switch the RTC (Rotation Tilt Control) to SERVICE mode. Push switch S1 on D301 (Service RTC) upward.
A detailed description of the RTC service functions can be found in the OEM manual: Gantry stationary Reg. 5
Service instructions Chapter 5.
4) Press 'Mode Key' (S5 on D301) to switch into Tilt Service.
5) Press 'Key 1' (S2 on D301) to initialize the frequency inverter for tilt.
6) Tilt the gantry with 'Key 1' and 'Key 2' (S2 and S3 on D301) until it is vertical. Check with level.
7) Rotate the tilt sensor in the upper mounting screw until the display on the RTC LCD shows: 0.0 ± 0.1 degrees.
8) Tighten the sensor's mounting screws taking care not to let it move.
9) Switch off SERVICE mode (S1 on D301 down)
10) Reinstall the covers.
11) Actuate a STOP and a RESET to build up the communication between the controllers.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Slice Thickness Selection PROCEDURE TABLE


With this procedure, six different thicknesses can be selected for system use from a range of 1-10 mm in 1 mm
steps. Slice 2 or 3 mm and slice 10 mm must be configured. The remaining slices can be selected freely.
Program requirements
Configure these slices:
• 2.0 mm or 3.0 mm
• 10.0 mm
Procedure
1) Change to service mode: SYSTEM… CHANGE MODE...
2) Select SYSTEM… RUN…
3) Select SliceSelect and press GO
4) Select six slice widths, the 2 or 3 mm and 10 mm must be included.
5) Click Apply to store the new configuration.
6) Select Exit and restart application software (Somaris).
Note You have to tune all slices thicker than the smallest one changed.

Tune Up after changing a slice


The necessary adjustment steps are X’ed in the Required Procedures under the Collimator column.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Patient Table Adjustments PROCEDURE TABLE


Horizontal and vertical table travel may require calibration. There are two kinds of horizontal table adjustment, Table
Top and Top Support.
General Procedure for Horizontal Drives
1) Enter SERVICE MODE (System… Change Mode… Service # ) then select Service… Adjust…
2) Click PHSHoriz for adjustment of horizontal table travel. When you select PHSHoriz, the TOP SUPPORT
and TABLE TOP functions are both selected. To adjust one at a time, deselect the other by clicking on it.
3) Click GO on the adjustment screen.
4) Click DONE to store the determined values or CANCEL to discard them.
Table Top Distance Calibration
The Table Top adjustment software determines the number of encoder pulses in 1200 mm of movement. Then the
Table Top is moved 1650 mm in increments of 50 mm and the potentiometer value for each increment is stored.
Top Support Distance Calibration
The adjustment software PHSHoriz moves the Top Support 350 mm toward the gantry in 50 mm increments and
sets the potentiometer values. The Top Support values are stored in the Flash PROM of the PTH board.
Vertical Drive Calibration
ADC values for the highest and lowest table positions are determined and stored during the vertical adjustment.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Horizontal Feed Accuracy (Table Top Calibration) PROCEDURE TABLE


1) Raise the table to the normal position; the display on the gantry keypad shows 125 (mm below isocenter).
2) Install the bracket (part no. 30 62 242) at the rear end of the table top.
3) Insert the pin (part no. 30 62 283) into the holes of the bracket.
4) Align the table top precisely with the rear mark on the frame below the rear top support cover.
5) With a tension gauge, pull the table top with 50 N ± 4 N toward the gantry pressing the pin against the notch.
6) Release the tension gauge.
7) Click GO.
8) Align the table top precisely with the front mark on the frame below the rear top support cover.
9) Watch the pin when moving the table top.
10) With a tension gauge, pull the table top with 50 N ± 4 N toward the gantry pressing the pin against the notch.
11) Click GO .
12) Remove the pin.
13) Pull the table top away from the gantry until it reaches the mechanical end stop.
14) Then push it 7 mm ± 1 mm toward the gantry. Use the position displays on the gantry keypads or the GPC
(D311) in the right gantry pedestal to check the distance moved toward the gantry.
15) At the end of the adjustment click DONE to save the results or CANCEL to discard them.

Return to Table Adjustments

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Top Support Calibration


This procedure feeds the Patient Table’s Top Support in at 50 mm increments, reads the R710 potentiometer at
each stop, and stores those values in relation to the B710 Top Support feed encoder. The R710 potentiometer
backs up the B710 encoder in maintaining feed accuracy.
Calibrating the Top Support
1) From the top menu bar, select Service… Adjust… PHSHoriz.
2) Select TOP SUPPORT then GO. The program will automatically move the Top Support in 50 mm increments
and return it to a parked position.
3) Click on DONE to the store the values or CANCEL to not store them.

Return to Table Adjustments

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Vertical Table Movement (PHSVert) Calibration PROCEDURE TABLE


1) Remove anything lying on the Table Top.
2) Move the Table Top and Top Support completely away from the gantry to the parked position.
3) Measure the distance between the upper edge of the tabletop and the floor at the center of the table.
4) Go into SERVICE MODE and select ADJUST.
5) Select PHSVert to adjust vertical table travel.
6) Set the controller for vertical table travel to SERVICE MODE using switch S703 in the table base.
7) Use service switch S701 to raise the table to its
maximum position, 1022 mm above the floor. Measure
the height in the center of the table.
8) Click GO button on the adjustment screen to accept the
ADC value for the highest table position.
9) Use service switch S702 to lower the table to its
minimum position, 480 mm. Measure the height at the
center of the table.
10) Click GO to accept the ADC value for the lowest table position.
11) Switch off SERVICE MODE for vertical table travel, use switch S703.
12) Click DONE on the adjustment screen to store the determined values in the flash PROM of the PTV
controller.

Return to Table Adjustments

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Getter (Season) the Tube PROCEDURE TABLE


Note The current and filament current values used to degas a tube are specific to the tube. They are stored
on an MOD delivered with the X-ray tube. You should load this data when replacing the X-ray tube.
Refer to "Load X-ray Tube Tables."
1) Enter the SERVICE… ADJUST… program.
2) Click GETTER .
3) Select a voltage level and click GO .
4) Start the getter procedure by pressing the Start key.
Ten scans are performed at that voltage. When each series completes, the system displays the number of scans in
which the tube arced. If you had selected the "Repeat..." check box and the tube arced during the ten scans, those
scans are repeated at the same voltage. If the tube continues to arc at the same voltage level after five attempts,
the gettering procedure is halted.
If the tube did not arc, or you had not selected the "Repeat...." check box, the next higher voltage level is selected
and the procedure continues.
The gettering procedure succeeds when ten scans complete at 140 kV without the tube arcing.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Detector Diaphragm (DetDia) PROCEDURE TABLE

This procedure checks and sets parameter values for the Detector Diaphragm encoder held in the DLP_MCB on
DELPHI D573. The encoder tracks the aperture width. This procedure will describe three position adjustments.
Detector diaphragm adjustments can be made without software support. Use the DELPHI switches and LEDs to
store new values to the Flash PROM after an adjustment. Go to the next adjustment if the DELPHI LED "MSG"
lights. Repeat an adjustment if it is flashing.
Tools Required
• 2 mm diameter rod (part 71 04 508)
• Adjustment pin (part 87 85 099) Long end=16.55 mm and short end=16.65 mm
• Allen keys
• Tension gauge
• Screwdriver
Gain Access
1) Enter SERVICE MODE (System… Change Mode… Service # ) then select Service… Adjust….
2) Select DET-DIA.
3) Click GO. The detector moves to the 6 o'clock position (detector down).
4) Use a screwdriver to open the front gantry door.
5) Disable gantry rotation, rotate switch S301 to OFF. Insert the safety bolt.
6) Set the detector diaphragm controller to SERVICE by setting switch S1 on board D573 DELPHI_CON to ON.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration
Remove the Detector Diaphragm Chain PROCEDURE TABLE
1) Remove the drive chain for the diaphragm blades. For detectors up to serial number 10023: Remove the
chain master link, then remove the chain. For detectors after serial number 10023: Loosen the intermediate
plate attachment screws and push the motor toward the spindle.
2) Remove any cable ties, then remove the chain.
Determine Difference Value
1) Turn the spindle pinion to set the diaphragm aperture to 16.65 mm; use the short end of the adjustment pin.
2) Measure the width of the aperture at the outer blade covers with a slide caliper.
3) Determine the calculated Diffvalue between the two measurements:
Check the Detector Encoder
The index pulse must be detected when the detector diaphragm opening is 18.95 mm ± 0.25mm.
1) Verify the Service switch S1 on the DELPHI D573 is set to “2.” The “SER” LED should be lit.
2) Press Service switch S4 on the DELPHI D573.
3) Adjust the diaphragm until the board D573 “INDEX” LED indicates encoder index pulse detection.
4) Measure the width of the aperture at the outer blade covers with a slide caliper.
5) The result should be DIFF + 18.95 mm ± 0.25mm. If not, go to Adjust the Detector Encoder.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Adjust the Detector Encoder PROCEDURE TABLE


If you are replacing the encoder, or if the DetDia test failed, you must reset the encoder. Do this in three steps. Set
the Index with an 18.95 opening. Next, set the 16.65 mm opening. Finally, set the 2 mm opening.
1) Verify the Service switch S1 on the DELPHI D573 is set to “2.” The “SER” LED should be lit.
2) Press Service switch S4 on the DELPHI D573.
3) Open the diaphragm to 18.95 mm ± 0.25 mm. Measure the aperture at the protection bars with a sliding
caliper. Subtract the calculated Diffvalue. The result should be 18.95 mm ± 0.25mm.
4) If it is not, use the spindle pinion to move the protection bars to the calculated value.
5) Loosen the encoder and turn the axle until you get the index pulse indicated at D573/DELPHI.
6) Install the encoder with no backlash between the pinion and the sprocket.
7) Adjust the diaphragm until the board D573 “INDEX” LED indicates index pulse detection.
8) Measure the protection bars with a sliding caliper. The aperture must be 18.95mm ± 0.25mm + Diffvalue.
9) If the correct aperture size is not achieved, the index pulse must be adjusted again. When the index pulse is
detected, the D573 “MSG” LED lights. You may proceed to the next step.
10) Turn the spindle pinion to set the diaphragm aperture to 16.65mm. Use the short end of the adjustment pin.
11) Press STORE (S4 on D573) to save this encoder value.
12) Use the drive pinion and the 2mm tool to set the diaphragm aperture to 2mm.
13) Press STORE (S4 on D573) to save the incremental encoder value.
14) Set the same values again to verify accuracy.
15) Turn the spindle pinion to set the diaphragm to 16.65 mm and press STORE.
16) Turn the spindle pinion to set the diaphragm to 2.00 mm and press STORE. Go to Install Detector Chain

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration
Install the Detector Drive Chain
PROCEDURE TABLE
1) Install the drive chain and secure the motor.
2) Attach the spring scale at the motor shaft with a cable tie.
3) Set the right chain tension to 40 N ± 5 N.
4) Secure the mounting plate of the motor. Secure the screws with loctite and tighten to 6 Nm torque.
5) Press STORE once more. The diaphragm moves to the control aperture, 16.60mm.
6) Verify the aperture with the adjustment pin; the long end is 16.55, the short end is 16.65. If the diaphragm
aperture does not open to 16.60 mm, repeat the adjustment procedure.
7) When the encoder is properly set, switch S2 on DELPHI D573 to OFF.
8) If using software, click DONE to store the values (or CANCEL to discard the values).

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

How to Adjust Detector Limit Switches PROCEDURE TABLE

Remove the Detector Diaphragm Chain


1) For detectors up to SN 10023: Remove the chain master link, then remove the chain. For detectors after SN
10023: Loosen the intermediate plate attachment screws and push the motor toward the spindle.
2) Remove any cable ties, then remove the chain.
Adjust S1
1) Turn the spindle pinion to set the diaphragm aperture to 16.65mm. Use the short end of the adjustment pin
(8785099) to set the width down inside the collimator.
2) Measure the width of the aperture at the outer blade cover with a slide caliper.
3) Subtract 16.65mm from this measurement to determine the difference (Diffvalue).
4) Now open the diaphragm using the spindle pinion until the width of the aperture at the outer blade cover is
equal to the Diffvalue + 19.6mm (tol +/- 0.2mm).
5) Move switch S1 until it switches with a “Click” then tighten it down.
Adjust S2
1) Close the diaphragm using the spindle pinion until the width of the aperture at the outer blade cover is equal
to the Diffvalue + 1.5mm (tol +/- 0.2mm).
2) Move switch S1 until it switches with a “Click” then tighten it down.
Install the Drive Chain
1) Install the drive chain and secure the motor.
2) Attach the spring scale at the motor shaft with a cable tie.
3) Set the right chain tension to 40 N ± 5 N. Test Detector Limits
4) Secure the mounting plate of the motor. Secure the screws with Loctite 242 and tighten to 6 Nm torque. TEST

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Test Detector Diaghram Limits PROCEDURE TABLE


1) Go into SERVICE MODE and select SERVICE… CONTROL… DIAPHRAGM.
2) Select 1 mm diaphragm aperture and execute. The diaphragm should move to the 1 mm opening.
3) While holding switch S1 IN select a 10 mm diaphragm and execute. The system should error out requiring a
RESET because the diaphragm is not allowed to move with the S1 switch made.
4) Release S1, RESET the system, select a 10 mm slice and execute. Diaphragm should move to the 10 mm
opening.
5) While holding switch S2 IN select a 1 mm diaphragm and execute. The system should error out requiring a
RESET because the diaphragm is not allowed to move with the S2 switch made.
6) Release S2 and RESET the system.
7) Perform a Scan Setup… Quality… Constancy Test in order to check system performance.

Adjust Detector Limit Switches

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Z-Position of Tube Diaphragm (Z-Adjust) PROCEDURE TABLE


The detector provides maximum output when the X-ray beam is centered precisely with respect to the detector
elements. The optimal tube diaphragm positions for the low, middle, and high channels are determined during the
Z- Adjust scan. Then you adjust the diaphragm blades on the collimator as needed. Since the two blades have
separate motors, the diaphragm aperture and its Z-position can be set simultaneously.
Pre-settings for the two collimator diaphragms and the determination of their characteristic curves are made in the
factory. The tables corresponding to each diaphragm are stored on the disk delivered with the diaphragm. They
must be loaded when the new diaphragm is installed. See "Load the tube diaphragm parameters."
Prerequisites
• Tube Diaphragm serial number listed correctly in SYSTEM… CONFIG...
• Tube Diaphragm parameter tables loaded.
Procedure
1) Remove all objects from the measurement field.
2) Go into SERVICE MODE then select Service… Adjust...
3) Select Z-Adjust in the Adjust platform.
4) Perform a scan as prompted by the program. The measurements are displayed in a separate platform. If the
diaphragm position is not OK, instructions appear on the monitor.
5) Move the tube to 12 o'clock position.
6) Open the gantry door and disable gantry rotation. Set switch S301 to OFF and insert the safety bolt.
7) Remove the cover of the tube diaphragm box (Allen key 3 mm).
8) Attach the two dial gauges.
9) Loosen the four attachment screws.
(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration
10) Adjust the diaphragm with the two adjustment screws according to the program printout. Adjustment on one
side influences the other side.
11) Tighten the attachment screws (torque 10.2 Nm). Watch that the reading on the gauges does not change.
Adjustment is in tolerance if 'Control Measurement Succeeded' appears.
12) Click DONE to save the results.
PROCEDURE TABLE

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

X-ray Alignment (Check Ali) PROCEDURE TABLE


Check Alignment uses a scan of a 10 mm aluminum rod to check X-ray beam alignment. It does not need to be
done if Focus Alignment was just done successfully.
In order to have a good alignment, the following must be true:
• aluminum rod was aligned close to but not at isocenter in the measurement field
• Rot mode with complete rotation was used
• measurement data was processed including calibration and stored ( check button in ROT mode platform )
• data was stored in raw data file (00001.RCT).
Collect Data
1) Put the 10 mm aluminum rod near but not at isocenter.
2) Close the gantry doors and slide the plexi stripe so that its seam is in the 2 o'clock position.
3) Select: Rotation Mode number 16; use SHOW, verify 5 mm, 120 kV,170 mA, 1.5 sec; do and store "calibrated"
data. If the 5 mm slice is not available, use a slice of 4 mm or 8 mm.
4) Press Start to collect scan data.
Analyze Results
1) Go into SERVICE MODE and select Service… Adjust….
2) Select CHECK ALI
3) Verify the results are -0.25 ± 0.03 channels for odd and 0.25 ± 0.03 channels for even readings.

If results are in tolerance, you can skip Focus Alignment. Always good to skip both Detector Tilt and Align.
If alignment is out of tolerance, do the Focus Alignment procedure.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Detector Tilt (DetTilt) PROCEDURE TABLE


Warning DO NOT DO THIS PROCEDURE UNLESS SPECIFICALLY ADVISED TO. APPLIES to XENON. Refer
to OEM manual page 8-5 if this procedure is needed for a UFC detector.
Detector output is maximized when the beam reaches the detector elements exactly in the window and exactly
perpendicular. This adjustment sets the optimal detector position to ensure the beam is normal to the elements.
To determine the optimal position, the detector is first de-adjusted by 1 mm and then moved back toward the initial
position by 0.2 mm after each scan. The output signal for the middle group of channels is determined after each
scan. A scan is done after each increment and the output signal for channel 384 is used.
Caution Do not rotate the gantry with the dial-gauge mounted.

Procedure
1) Go into SERVICE MODE then select Service… Adjust...
2) Select DetTilt
3) Click GO to start the scan. The gantry is rotated until the detector is at the bottom.
4) Open the gantry door and disable gantry rotation (set switch S301 to OFF and insert the safety bolt).
5) Lower the patient table all the way; open the gantry doors, and remove the lower cover from the gantry.
6) Loosen the three M8 screws in the middle underneath the detector.
7) Install the mounting plate for the gauge on the gantry frame.
8) Insert the gauge in the holder until the display is in the middle range (Indicator points to 5.00 mm).
9) Loosen the six M8 screws (tilt screws and at the left- and right hand side of the detector.
10) Loosen the M6 backing nut at the adjustment screw (CCW) at the right hand side of the detector.
11) Turn out the adjustment screw as far until the detector can be shifted to the left mechanical end.
12) Pull up the detector at the left hand side and push it down at the right. (continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration
13) Lower the detector by turning the tilt adjustment screw to the right by the amount specified by the program.
The value specified by the software refers to the value displayed by the gauge.
14) Start the scan. PROCEDURE TABLE

15) Adjust the detector upward on the right side after each scan as indicated by the program (turn the tilt
adjustment screw to the right).
16) Perform the scans and adjustments as indicated by the program until the program has determined the optimal
tilt setting. When setting the optimal position, it is necessary to move the detector from the same starting
point used when generating the measurement values. First move the detector past the optimal position by
hand then raise the right side until it reaches the optimal position.
17) Turn out the adjustment screw that the detector can be moved by hand until the gauge indicates a value
approximately 0.3 mm greater than the value specified as the optimal position.
18) Turn the adjustment screw to the right to raise the right side of the detector until it reaches the optimal
position.
19) Tighten the six M8 tilt screws; alternate the left- and right hand side of the detector with 25 Nm. The gauge
should not change its value. Until the alignment is good, it is not necessary to torque the three middle M8
screws.
Note Although the attachment plate can remain installed, the gauge must be removed to allow gantry rotation.
20) Remove the mounting plate for the gauge from the gantry frame.
21) Tighten the three M8 screws in the middle underneath the detector with 25 Nm.
22) Check the adjustment by doing a scan; repeat the adjustment described above if the value is out of tolerance.
Caution Turn out the adjustment screw by two full turns and secure it with its backing nut. Take care not
to create an electrical short to the gantry frame!
23) Enable gantry rotation (safety bolts and rotating safety switch) and close the gantry doors.
24) Click DONE to end the Detector Tilt program.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Detector Alignment (DetAli) PROCEDURE TABLE


In 1997, Siemens determined that the DetAli program was no longer needed.
The goal of the DetAli program was to perfectly align the center channel of the detector over the exact center of the
tube focal spot and EFC collimator. They determined that their detectors were already perfectly aligned in the
factory and this program was not needed any more.
The only time this type of program was needed was in case both the tube and detector were being replaced at the
same time, which was deemed extremely rare.
In the case where both the tube and detector are being replaced, Siemens has supplied a new adjustment
procedure in the newer (1997) manuals. These instructions are found in the System manual, Register 5, page 8-9

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Dosis Monitor Position PROCEDURE TABLE


The goal of this adjustment is to position the DOSIS_MON, D 550. It is located outside the collimator port. The
monitor should cover as few channels on the detector as possible, but still be as far into the scan field in order to
measure the full dose. This measurement adjusts the output reduction due to the EF-collimator characteristics.
Prepare the gantry
Disable gantry rotation: Check "off" at "Rotation". Set gantry switch S301 to OFF. Secure the safety bolt.
Collect the test data
1) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Control…
2) Select Gantry in the Control platform and at "Gantry Position" enter: 90°°.
3) Select Static Mode: Scan Mode… Static
4) Select X-ray parameters: 10 mm, 120 kV, 1 sec, 240 mA, TubePos: As is
5) Store data as: "logarithmized"
6) Click GO then press START
Evaluate the test data
1) Start: Service… Analyze…:
2) Select: WA: (working area) number " 1 ". Load the data: click LOAD and select: 00001.RCT .
3) Select WA (working area) number " 1 ". Generate the mean value (Mean) for all readings: click STAT MEAN
and GO .
4) Select WA 18, Plot, GO.
5) Magnify the far right end of the plot, the last 30 channels. Note how many channels are covered. If four are
covered, you’re done. If not, proceed to the next page.
(continued on(continued)
next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration
Covered Channels Not Equal to 4 PROCEDURE TABLE
The covered channels are the high channels also known as channels 761 to 768.
1) If more than four are covered: release the four screws holding the DOSIS_MON, D 550 and move it out of
the x-ray beam 1 mm.
If less than four are covered: release the four screws holding the DOSIS_MON, D 550 and move it into the
x-ray beam 1 mm.
Note If a step of 1 mm is too much to achieve the proper position, take smaller steps.
2) Collect new test data.
3) Evaluate the test data.

If you cannot achieve exactly four covered channels, this could mean:
• Something is blocking the port
• A beam limiting lead bar is in too far
• The Dosis Monitor mounting holes may not be centered

Go to Z Monitor Position

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Z- Monitor Position PROCEDURE TABLE


The Z-Monitor on the right end of the detector when it is at 6 o'clock should be as close to the first detector channel
as possible without obscuring it.
Procedure
1) Release the four screws of the ZMON_2 (D585) and move it to the left (center) as far as possible.
2) Select Scan Mode: Static " 16 " SHOW 3 mm, 120 kV, 20 kW, 1.5 sec, TubePos: 270, store "normalized"
data.
3) Click GO
4) Press the Start button.
5) Start Service… Analyze…
6) Select WA (working area) number "1".
7) Select 00001.RCT and click LOAD
8) Click STAT MEAN to generate the mean value (Mean) for all readings.
9) Click GO
10) Select WA 18 and Plot
11) Calculate required movement by multiplying the number of covered channels by 1.187, the width of a detector
chamber. Try to move the Z_MON between this value in mm and 0.5 mm more. Keep Z_MON parallel to the
detector. It must not cover any channels. If one is covered, move Z_MON 1.2 to 1.7 mm outward.
If 2 covered channels: move the ZMON_2 between 2.4 and 2.8 mm outward.
If 3 covered channels: move the ZMON_2 between 3.5 and 4.1 mm outward.
12) Check the new position of the Z-monitor with another scan and analysis.
13) After you move the Z_MON, ZMON calibration will have to be redone.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Focus Alignment PROCEDURE TABLE


Tube Focus Alignment is achieved in three steps:
Adjustment of phase: This step determines the synchronization between the sync-signal 'EVENREA' (coming from
DMS) and the PROM data for the focus deflection on the DELPHI DLP_MCB board.
Adjustment of amplitude: The amplitude of the focus deflection is determined in mm based on a neutral position.
With the specified phase, the amplitude is set so that the deflection equals half the width of one detector element.
Adjustment of offset: With the specified phase and amplitude, the offset of the focus deflection is set so that the
central beam (without focus deflection) is exactly in the center of the detector.
If the offset adjustment is out of tolerance, Detector Alignment must be redone.
The settings for phase, amplitude, and offset depend on the focus size (large/small) and anode rotation speed.
Adjustments must be done for all combinations of these parameters.
Procedure
1) Put the 10 mm aluminum rod near but not at isocenter.
2) Verify the gantry doors are installed and the plexi stripe seam is at the 2 o'clock position.
3) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Adjust…
4) Select: Focus Align
5) Select the parameters desired for the scan by clicking the buttons Phase , Ampl. and/or Offset . Click on the
CAL. check box to enable calibration.
6) Click GO
7) Press the Start button.
8) Perform the scans as indicated. Adjustment is in tolerance if 'Focus alignment succeeded' appears.
9) Click DONE to save results.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Tube Voltage PROCEDURE TABLE


The voltage adjustment sets the generator parameters (tube voltage, tube current, filament current and dose) so
that a specific noise value (Sigma in Hounsfield Units) is measured in a 20 cm water phantom. The noise value
from the water phantom image is evaluated for each selected voltage from only one scan. The values for tube
current and dose for the other outputs at each voltage level are calculated by interpolation and the value for the
corresponding filament currents is determined by an additional scan.
Procedure
1) Verify the gantry doors are installed and the plexi stripe seam is at the 2 o'clock position.
2) Go into SERVICE MODE and select Service… Adjust….
3) Select Voltage.
4) All voltages, both focus sizes, and calibration are selected in the parameter field. If the adjustment only needs
to be done for a specific combination of parameters, deselect the others by clicking their checkboxes. If
calibration should not be performed before the adjustment, deselect it by clicking it.
5) Install the 20cm water phantom on the bracket at the head end of the table and position it in the center of the
measurement field.
6) Click GO
7) Press the Start key.
8) Make the adjustment indicated by the program. Once the phantom is centered, the program can then do the
subsequent filament adaptation scan and report the generator characteristics.
9) Click DONE to store the results.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Filament Adaptation PROCEDURE TABLE

General
Filament adaptation adjusts filament current to changes in the filament due to aging. This procedure is
automatically added to the morning calibration procedure at specific intervals. You do not need to perform filament
adaptation if you have done a voltage adjustment.
Procedure
1) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Adjust…
2) Select FilAdapt. The voltages and focus sizes for which the adaptation procedure should be performed are
displayed in the parameter field. All parameters are selected when the program is called up. Click those
parameters for which it should not be performed to de-select them.
3) Click GO to load an adjustment mode.
4) Perform the adjustment as indicated by the program.
5) Click DONE to store the results or CANCEL to discard them.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Z-Monitor Calibration (ZmonCal) PROCEDURE TABLE


The Z-Monitor Calibration determines the gain factor for the output signals of the Z-monitor. It also determines the
relationship between the signal amplitudes of the PHI monitors and the Z-monitor. The Z_MON adjustment and the
generator Voltage adjustment must be completed before this calibration.
Procedure
1) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Adjust…
2) Select ZMonCal. Z-calibration must be done for each scan voltage. When the program starts, all voltages are
selected automatically. Click those voltages for which it should not be done to de-select them.
3) Click GO.
4) Perform the scan as indicated by the program.
Adjustment is in tolerance if ' Z-monitor adjustment succeeded ' appears.
5) Click DONE in the Adjust platform to save the values or CANCEL to discard them.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Light Marker Separation (LIMA) PROCEDURE TABLE


This adjustment is for Move to Scan accuracy. You measure the distance between the external stationary light and
the internal rotating light markers with a tape measure, then enter this value into the program.
Procedure
1) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Adjust…
2) Select LightM.
3) Close the gantry doors.
4) Move the tabletop to normal height (display 125).
5) Move the tabletop into the gantry until the light from both light markers can be seen on the tabletop. Measure
the distance between the light markers with a tape measure.
6) Enter the distance using the alphanumeric keys or the decrement or increment button.
7) To select another Move To Scan speed, enter the desired value. Table speed can be from 0.5 to 150 mm/s.
8) Click DONE to store the values.
9) Check the adjustment with Scan Setup... Quality Constancy.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Tabgen PROCEDURE TABLE


Use the TABGEN service software to test and adjust the electronics for Data Acquisition. TABGEN software
performs the following corrections:
• Base calibration Base Cal
• Channel error correction CCR
• Difference calibration Diff Cal
• Determine center channel Beam Cent
• Beam hardening correction Beam Hard
• Water scaling Scaling
• UFC spacing, if present Spacing
General Procedure
1) Close the gantry and room doors because rotation and X-ray will be used.
2) Verify the gap in the plexi strip is at 2 o'clock.
3) Watch the test images for streaks, rings or other artifacts.
4) Repeat the test if there are more than three errors; repair if they remain.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Channel Error Correction (CCR) PROCEDURE TABLE


The CCR procedure adjusts for the channel to channel gain differences. The correction depends on tube voltage,
slice thickness, reading number, the absorbers, and the path through an absorber. Different absorbers are used
when determining the correction tables for head and body modes.
Tools Required
• CCR head phantom (with plastic bar)
• CCR body phantom (without plastic bar)
Procedure
1) Align the head or body phantom for the mode to be corrected; lower the table as low as it will go without
touching the funnel; the internal laser light should fall on the phantom’s white line.
2) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen….
3) Select CCR
4) Select the desired parameters.
1) Click GO.
2) Select Check to get a control image.
3) Perform the scans as indicated by the program.
4) Inspect the control images. They should not have any ring artifacts.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Difference Calibration (DiffCal) PROCEDURE TABLE


The channels of the measurement system have different levels of sensitivity, which are made up of a base term and
a difference term. Base calibration determines chronological variations. It needs to be done at regular intervals. The
difference calibration tables are generated once during the tune-up. They determine the differences in sensitivity for
the current scan mode independent of time.
Procedure
1) Remove all absorbers from the measurement field.
2) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen….
3) Select DiffCal in the Tabgen platform.
4) Select the mode you want to calibrate, being sure to select Base Calibration, then click GO.
5) Perform the scans indicated by the program.
Adjustment is in tolerance if ' Difference Calibration finished ' appears.
Click EXIT only if you want to discard the new values.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Center Channel (BeamCent) PROCEDURE TABLE


Beam Centering determines the center channel by using where the phantom thickness penetrated by the beam was
the smallest, meaning the beam was perpendicular at this point. The program uses the attenuation values of the
body phantom determined during the Channel Error Correction.
Procedure
1) Center the 20 cm water phantom in the scan field.
2) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen….
3) Select BeamCent.
4) Use the default values.
5) Click GO.
6) Perform the scans as indicated by the program.
7) If the phantom is not centered, reposition of the phantom as indicated by the program.
Once the phantom is centered, the correction coefficients will be calculated and stored. The center channel is
determined. The results are displayed.
Adjustment is in tolerance when ' Beam Center finished ' appears.
Note Do not move the water phantom once Beam Center is done until Beam Hardening is done.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Beam Hardening Correction PROCEDURE TABLE


Beam Hardening Correction tries to balance the different attenuation values caused by the different path lengths of
X-ray travelling through the water phantom or EFC (Extra Function Collimation) filter due to energy hardening. The
beam hardening correction coefficients are determined so that the mean deviation in homogeneity in the phantom
image is as low as possible.
Correction tables are needed for all combinations of tube voltage and slice thickness used at your site.
Prerequisites
CCR and Beam Center must be done first.
Procedure
1) The 20 cm water phantom should be where it was for the Beam Center correction.
2) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen….
3) Select BeamHard.
4) Select the desired parameters.
5) Click GO.
6) Perform the scans as indicated by the program.
7) If the phantom is not centered, reposition of the phantom as indicated by the program and repeat.
Once the phantom is centered, five ROI's will be drawn in the phantom image. The mean values of these areas will
be displayed.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Base Calibration (BaseCal) PROCEDURE TABLE


Base calibration adapts the DMS parameters to changes in the sensitivity of the DMS data measurement system.
Base calibration must be done regularly at normal operating temperature.
BaseCal is available in both customer and service mode. In customer mode, it is found under Scan Setup…
Checkup… Comparing their results can be informative.
Base calibration tables are determined for each rotational speed.
Procedure
1) Remove all absorbers from the measurement field.
2) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen….
3) Select BaseCal in the Tabgen platform.
4) Select the desired rotate speeds.
5) Click GO.
6) Perform the scans indicated by the program. Click EXIT only if you want to discard the new values.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Water Scaling (Scaling) PROCEDURE TABLE


Water must have a CT value of 0 ± 4 HU in the reconstructed image. To ensure this condition, each measurement
view is multiplied by a scaling value during pre-processing. These scaling values are determined with the Scaling
program. Scaling factors depend on tube voltage, slice thickness, focus size, and scan time.
Prerequisites
All calibrations must be completed before determining the scaling factors.
Procedure
1) Center the 20 cm water phantom in the scan field.
2) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen….
3) Select Scaling.
4) Select the desired parameters.
5) Click GO.
6) Perform the scans as indicated by the program.
7) If the phantom is not centered, reposition of the phantom as indicated by the program.
Once the phantom is centered, an ROI will be drawn in the center of its image. The mean value of the water will be
determined with the old scaling factor. A new scaling factor will be calculated so that the area within the ROI has a
mean value of 0 ± 4 HU. The old and new scaling factors will be displayed.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

UFC Detector Spacing Correction PROCEDURE TABLE


Some Plus 4 CT’s are equipped with solid state UFC detectors instead of the standard Xenon gas detectors. You
can identify a UFC detector by its lack of a gas pressure gauge.
The solid state UFC detector needs a special correction done for it called Spacing. The Spacing program corrects
for the unequal distances that may exist between detector elements.
1) Remove the plexi strip from the funnel.
2) Attach the spacing correction phantom (part number 1608863) to the front of the table and feed it in. Adjust
table height so that the plexi cylinder is vertically centered in the scan field, but horizontally off center by
240mm.
3) Put the system in SERVICE MODE and select Service… Tabgen…. Spacing
4) Click GO.
5) The patient table will automatically feed during this program.
6) When the program is finished, select DONE to accept the corrections or QUIT to discard them.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Save Tables PROCEDURE TABLE


Note Remember to backup the latest parameter tables to MOD.
Note If this MOD disk is left in when the scanner is rebooted, it can destroy all the tune-up data on the disk!
Software parameters that define system operation are loaded into the appropriate controller (MCU/RTC/PTH…)
when the scanner is reset or powered on. The tune-up files created during tune-up are part of the system tables.
These files (tables) need to be saved after tune-up to ensure system recovery in case of hard disk problems. It is
possible to save the tables to a MOD disk or to a special directory on the system hard disk. For obvious reasons, it
is always best to save to a MOD disk no matter what.
How to Save Tables
1) The scanner needs to be in Service Mode. Select System… Change_Mode… Service
2) Then select System… Run… Save_Tables
3) If saving to MOD disk: Insert the MOD disk in the main MOD drive. Choose option 2
If saving to the special directory on the hard disk: Choose option 1
4) When copying is finished, REMOVE THE MOD DISK, choose option 0, and reboot the scanner.
How to Restore Tables
1) The scanner needs to be in Service Mode. Select System… Change_Mode… Service
2) Then select System… Run… Restore_Tables
3) If restoring from MOD disk: Insert the MOD disk in the main MOD drive. Choose option 2
If restoring from the special directory on the hard disk: Choose option 1
4) When prompted with “restore all tables? y or n” answer with: y
5) When copying is finished, REMOVE THE MOD DISK, choose option 0, then reboot the scanner.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Video Monitor Adjustments PROCEDURE TABLE


Note Allow the monitor to warm for at least 20 minutes.
1) Start somaris.
2) Select Patient and Image 1 of the Reference Images (Grey scale image with W 256/ C 0).
3) Select full screen display.
Adjust RGB Signal Amplitude
1) Connect the scope. Ground point M
2) Measure point R Adjust 1 Volt porch to peak with potentiometer R
3) Measure point G Adjust 1 Volt porch to peak with potentiometer G
4) Measure point B Adjust 1 Volt porch to peak with potentiometer B
Adjust brightness and contrast
1) Darken the room.
2) Degauss the monitor.
3) Press and hold the round button at the front of the monitor for three seconds.
4) Use the pots on the right side near the front to adjust brightness and contrast.
If you use the Siemens tool (9702432) called the Mavo Monitor,
white has the value 50 cd/m2 ± 2 cd/m2
and black has the value of 0.35 cd/m2 ± 0.1 cd/m2

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Image Rotation Correction


If the displayed image is not positioned correctly, if it is displayed rotated when the patient is not turned, then the
AlphaNull program needs to be run. This program adjusts the starting angle against which the images are
referenced.
1) Attach one of the CCR plexi-bar phantoms to the end of the table and feed it into the field. Use a spirit level
to make sure the top of the phantom is perfectly horizontal.
2) Perform a scan in any rotation mode that can view the phantom as a whole.
3) If the image appears tilted or rotated, use the top menu bar program Evaluation… Angle to see how
many degrees it is from being perfectly horizontal. This number should be in the range of one to ten.
4) Select System… Run… ALPHANULL… Show and note the angle number displayed. It should be
between –36.00 and –46.00 degrees.
5) Add the number of degrees from step 3 to the displayed angle is off from step 4.
Enter the sum as the new SYSTEM…RUN…ALPHANULL angle. (The higher the number the more counter
clockwise the image will be rotated).
6) Repeat this procedure to verify the correction has taken place.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Alignment and Calibration

Calibrating the Water Cooling System


The set points for the gantry air temperature, IMS and the Generator Cabinet (Plus4 Power only), and the error
condition delay time are calibrated using three potentiometers on the WCS controller board.
The error delay time is the time it takes a Temperature error to become a SUM error. Sum errors are reported to
the Host computer, Temperature errors are not. Remove and reinstall covers as needed.
Gantry Air Temperature Set Point
1) Press the “Channel” button on the front of the WCS until you see “Air Nom”.
(If an error message is being displayed (E1-5), the reset button must be pushed first)
2) Turn the left potentiometer (2P1) until the number reads 27.0°C
3) Press the “Channel” button until you see “Air Act” and the display changes.
IMS/Generator Water Temperature Set Point (Plus 4 Power Only)
1) Press the “Channel” button on the front of the WCS until you see “HST Nom”.
(If an error message is being displayed (E1-5), the reset button must be pushed first)
2) Turn the middle potentiometer (2P2) until the number reads 23.0°C
3) Press the “Channel” button until you see “HST Act” and the display changes.
Error Condition Delay Time Set Point
1) Press the “Channel” button on the front of the WCS until you see “ERR Delay”.
(If an error message is being displayed (E1-5), the reset button must be pushed first)
2) Turn the right potentiometer (2P3) until the number reads 15 minutes (this can be extended to 30).
3) Press the “Channel” button until you see “Air Act” and the display changes.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Component Locations

Console
Imaging Cabinet
Water Cooling System (WCS) Cabinet
Generator Cabinet
Gantry
Table

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

CRT

Software Menus

Keyboard

ConCon

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Keyboard
Emergency STOP
button

LCD Function Keys

Scanner
Window Power
Pots Switches

CRT

ConCon

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Console Control Box (ConCon)


• CON_PWR E801 and Line Filter Z801 provide ±12V for the LCD function keys, keyboard, and mouse
• Console Power Switches interface with 24V PDS Relays K1, K2 (fuse 3) through the IMS Split Bd D204
• Relays keyboard and mouse signals to CIB or CCI
• Relays audio from console to CIB
• Interface for CIB API (autovoice)
• Contains S1 to turn off console and CRTs

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Front View Temperature


Sensor B304

Safety
Bolt
Fan M304

Heat
Exchanger

Safety Heat
Exchanger
Switch
S301 Fan M305

Door Door
Switch Switch
S304 S305

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Rotating Components


Dosis X-ray
Monitor Tube
Positive Damping Negative Damping
Resistor Resistor
Tube Air Cooling Tube Diaphragm
Radiator (Collimator)

Tube Oil Cooling Rotating Anode


Pump Control (RAC)
Digital
Analog Power Unit Power Unit

Lasers for
Trafo Unit patient XC Box
(Transformer) alignment (X-ray Control)

Z Mon_2

C Box
(Acquisition Detector
Control)
Integrator
boards

Gantry Stationary

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Pedestals
Left Pedestal Right Pedestal

Fan Gantry Front View


Dehumidifier
M304 Rotate
& filter
Converter

Gantry Slip Rings


Z303 GPC
Gantry
Panel
Tilt Control
Sensor

Gantry Rotating Tilt Lock


power supply

Tilt LPS
Converter
MCU-RTC

Z304

Gear
fuses

Relays Tilt Motor


Box

Circuit Gantry Rear View Fan


Breakers Z302 Z306
Brake M305
Z301

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Slip Ring Links

Access from the front


Access from the rear
HV Slip Rings
HV Brushes
Power and Control Slip Rings
Control Board and Brushes
DMS electronics
Audio, Control and Power Cables to Gantry Rotating

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Analog Power Unit (APU)


APU Data Acquisition
Control Box (C-Box)
Power Adjustments

APU
Integrator Board Power
Level Adjustments

The APU (E504) is


composed of seven power
supplies with built in
voltage monitoring. Three
of them supply the DAS
integrator boards; the other
four supply the C-Box.
The APU gets its AC power
from the Trafo Unit behind
it through two connectors
on the top. NOTE: The
Trafo gets its AC from the
D575 Board in XC-Box.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

C Box (Data Acquisition Control)


If scanner has a UFC de
ACU_2 D513
contains ACU_MCB
ADC1 D511
ADC2
Dosis Monitor Signal
ADC3 from D550

Detector Data Detector HV (D40)


for IC detectors
(input)
If scanner has a
UFC Detector, this
is a Detector Heater
Control Board
(D504) instead

ACU_1 Scan Data to DMS


D512 Slip Rings then to
SMI (output)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Collimator (E555)

Also known as the Tube Diaphragm; it determines


slice thickness and hardens X-ray to the parameters
selected by the operator. The signal from the
FOC_MON (E556) and PHI_AMP (D555) inside the
collimator helps to dynamically adjust the beam: its
z position, its deflection focus and intensity (dose
rate). It also helps to sync processes.

Dosis Monitor (D550)


senses the presence of X-
ray; its signal to ACU_1
helps to time and quantify
Data Acquisition.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Digital Power Unit (E530)

Power levels to XC Box


Backplane are monitored by
the MCB’s on the DELPHI,
FIL_CON, and Z_CON

X1 +5V, ±15V, +24V to XC


Box backplane D570
X3 +5V, ±15V to RAC Box
backplane D98
X4 -5V to DMS Slip Ring
Driver D415
X2 +5V and +24V to
ACU_2 D513

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Detector (E585)

Detector
Diaphragm
Driver

Outer Blade
Covers

Fan Driver

DAS fans

Pressure
Gauge

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Z-Monitor (D585)
S1 Detector Diaphragm
Limit Switch

S2

Attachment screw

Spindle

Power Diagram

Z-Mon_2
detects how
well centered
the beam is in
the Z direction
or in/out

Drive Chain

Motor

Detector Diaphragm
Encoder

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Measurement Data Slip Ring Receiver

DMS SLR Term


D416

SLR Driver D415


is on opposite
side of DMS Slip
Ring Terminator

Measurement
Data Receiver
SLR_REC
D410

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

MCU-RTC (D301)
Left Pedestal
Step LCD S5 S4 S3 S2 S1

LEDs
Service
Mode
Stop STOP loop Controls
(restart at console)

MCB for
Master
Controller
LCD for RTC
Unit
status, errors
(MCU)

MCB for
Rotate
LCD for and Tilt
MCU Control
status, (RTC)
errors

Service STOP
Switches:
YEL: keep Stop
GanSta or loop working in
GanRot Service Mode
Stop LED
RED: Service
Mode Emergency
STOP

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Relays and Breakers


E303 Output
Left Pedestal
F311 5V for
Solid State E-Stop MCU_RTC
Relays control gantry
rotation power
D321 F312 12V for
MCU_RTC
D322

D323 F313 12V


for GPC

D324 passes AC to Tilt Converter F314 24V for


MCU_RTC
Power from PDS to Gantry
F301 Mains L1, L2, L3 works
w/ D321, D322 and D323 for
Rotate F315 24V for
F302 230V works w/ D324 GPC, Audio,
For Tilt Control Data
SLR and DMS
F303 230V for GAN PS E303 SLR
F304 230V for Fan W304
F305 230V for Fan W305
F306 230V for GAN_ROT
Z306 Line FIlter
F307 230V for Dehumidifier
if UFC Detector
for Heating

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry KeyPads
E351

E352

D311

GPC inside
Right
Pedestal
supplies
power and
controls for
keypads

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Panel Control (GPC D311)


Right Pedestal
The GPC board is part of
the Patient Handling
System (PHS) and
MCB (D333)
functions primarily as the
for Gantry Patient Handling Control
Panel (PHC)
Control
(GPC) It is part of the CAN bus
and communicates with
the MCU_MCB D333
board in the left pedestal.
It can control table feed,
table lift, gantry tilt, and
the light markers either
through the gantry front
panel Keypads or the
Service Mode
service keys on this
Gantry Panel Controls: board.
-Table Horizontal
-Table Vertical It also uses the gantry
Keypads to show when
-Gantry Tilt
X-ray is ON and the
-Laser On/Off/Zero
scan’s kV, mA, and
-Move to Scan duration.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Laser Alignment Lights (LIMA)

External

One of four
Internal

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

LPS – Angular Pulse Encoder


The Light Barrier Board D302 fits over the slotted AP ring;
it counts angular pulses used for rotation speed
control and determining tube position (AP0, AP90, Index).

Metal Alignment Tool


inserted

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Rotation Frequency Converter Gantry Rotation


Frequency Converter
Power Distribution Fan controlled by E301
RTC_MCB
Left Pedestal

How to Program the FC:


Press: ↑ then ↔ then ↑ until PS: 333
Press: ↔ to store (colon stops blinking)
Press: ↑ or ↓ until 01: 0
Press: ↔ to store (colon stops blinking)
Press ↑ until 81: 0
Press: ↔ to store (colon stops blinking)
Press ↑ until 82: 1
If the colon ( : ) is blinking, press ↔

Then Reset the System


It’s done when state is `STANDBY’
Turn on lasers at keypad to test rotate

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Rotation Brake

Brake
Assembly

Rotation
Braking
Resistors

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Access to Slip Rings

Access Bolt (Gantry Lower Right Rear)

HV Slip
Rings

High
Voltage
Slip Ring
Cover
Rear
Funnel

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Rear Funnel Removal


Removing the rear funnel exposes the Control and Power Slip Rings

see bolt locations

Slotted
AP Ring

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Rear View

HV connectors 6 Funnel
from Generator H1 Bolts are
Tank to HV Slip removed
Rings from the
front side

Tighten to 10 Nm.
If silicon sleeve is
not properly placed
on candlestick, HTP
errors can occur.
There is a copper
ring to help do this.
To troubleshoot HV
slip rings, you could
disable rotation and
insert the HV cables
directly into
damping
resistors.

HV Tube
Ground

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

HV Brushes

Isolated
Tube
Ground

Positive
HV Cable
Brush

Negative
HV Cable
Brush

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Control and Power Slip Rings


Warning Power Slip Rings retain cap bank voltage
after power is removed until their discharge
resistors bleed them down. Wait a while or
use a grounding clamp and cable to
discharge the Power Slip Rings before
you work near them.
Note Maintenance of slip rings is key to
reliable operation. A contact that opens
for as little as 15 ms will cause a
STOP condition in the CAN bus.
Control Data
Slip Rings

Power Rings E420 carry: Power Slip Rings


E420 carry
N_UDC (Cap Bank Voltage) 230VAC and
P_UDC (positive anode start) Trigger from
DCC to start
Safety GRD rotating anode

230 Vac for GAN_ROT


Gantry Neutral Access to
If UFC, then 230 Heater V carbon
brushes

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Control Data


D400

Ring D400 E400 Signals


1 X11 Ctl_Dat_SR_Pos
2 X12 Ctl_Dat_SR_Neg
3 X13 Ctl_Dat_RS_Pos
4 X14 Ctl_Dat_RS_Neg
5 X15 CAN
6 X16 CAN

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Rotating Gantry Cables


Back of gantry
Audio Board and
Intercom Cable

24 V from GPC
The five cables
between the
Intercom and
Power cables are
various Control
cables.

Power
Cable has
230 Vac
and DCC
Start for
tube
anode

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Gantry Audio Components


Rear Funnel

Audio
Board
D341
Speaker

X20 Mic 1 Microphone


X21 Mic 2
X22
Speaker
Red 24V

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Temperature and Humidity Sensing


Thermal
Upper, Right, Front Gantry Switch
(B303)
helps create
a GPC
Ambient warning
air sensor when
B304 is temperature
monitored exceeds
by the 38°C
GPC

Humidity
Sensor
B302

42°C
Switch
(B305)
works to
remove
line
voltage
via PDS
F8 and K4

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Dehumidifier (E321)

Upper
Rear Left

Appearance of humidifier
when removed

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Tilt Drive Sensor (B301)


Left Pedestal

Z303
10A 250V
anti
interference
filter

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Tilt Frequency Converter (E302)


Left Pedestal
How to Program FC
Gantry
Press the blue program button: Power
Supply
Then ↑ or ↓ to select P009
Stationary
PSS
Then ↑ or ↓ to select 0003
E303
Then ↑ or ↓ to select P944

Then ↑ or ↓ to select 0001


Line Filter
Then ↑ or ↓ to select P009 Z304

Then ↑ or ↓ to select 0003

Then ↑ or ↓ to select P910

Then ↑ or ↓ to select 0001

Then Reset
Done when state is `STANDBY’
Use gantry keypads to test tilt

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Tilt Drive Spindle


Right Pedestal

Fast scan
with tilt and
detail imaging
can affect
image quality
due to
wobble

SAFETY:
Insert Tilt
LOCKING
BOLT here

The operator
cannot tilt the Tilt
Spindle
gantry from
the console
when ICT Gear Box
mode is
activated at
console. Tilt Motor M302

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Trafo (Transformer) Unit (E535) F1/1A Tube cooling pump, 230 Vac
F2/3.2A Trafo Unit Mains & Detector
High Voltage Board D40
F3/3A 19 Vac to APU (Ua1/+15vdc
to C-Box)
F4/3A 19 Vac to APU (Ua2/-15vdc
to C-Box)
F5/7A 9.5 Vac to APU (Ua3/-5vdc to
C-Box)
F6/4A 9.0 Vac to APU (Ua7/+5vdc to
C-Box)
F7/1A 19.5 Vac to APU Control and
PS monitoring
F8/15A 10.5 Vac to APU (Ua4/+5vdc /
to integrator boards in slots 1-
24)
F9/15A 10.5 Vac to APU (Ua5/+5vdc /
to integrator boards in slots
24-48)
F10/6.25A 19.5 Vac to APU (Ua6/+15vdc
/ to all integrator boards
F11/3A +24 Vdc to DAS & C-Box fans

Refer to Trafo Connectors

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Rotating Anode Control (RAC Box E560) Safety Pin


prevents
rotation

RAC

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

X-ray Control or XC Box (E570)


FIL_CON DELPHI Z_CON
XC SIDE 1 (D572) (D573) (D574)
(D571)
XC SIDE 2
POWER
(D576)
DISTRIBUTION
(D575)

X6 Power X6
CAN CAN
to/from from/to
RAC ACU

X4 Power X7
Phi-Amp Controls
Foc Mon from/to
Collimator ACU
Encoders

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

X-ray Tube (E550)


Tube at 12 o’clock

Tube Heat Sensing


monitored by DELPHI

Anode Power from


Pos. Damp. R

X1 +KV
X2 Isolated Gen.
ground from HV Slip
Rings
X3 -KV & Filament
drive
X4 Anode Rotation
Drive
X5 Flying Focus
Coil
X6 Temperature
and pressure
monitoring
X7 Isolated Gen.
ground from HV slip
rings & Neg.
Damping Resistor

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Damping Resistors
Tube at 6 o’clock
Negative (E552) Positive (E551)

To loosen the tube oil couplings, rotate them both


toward each other, inward, toward the area
Note They are NOT interchangeable. between them.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Patient Table PTH (D701) Patient Table


S701-703 Vertical Horizontal Drive Bd
Top View Service Drive
next to floor STOP Relay on floor D703
Frequency Converter
near floor is programmed
Table Top for Vertical Drive
(Cradle) (physically same as one
programmed for Tilt
Drive)

Side View

Black
accordion
Power plastic cover
Supply
(G700)
PTV (D702)
Spindle Brake Y702 Patient Table
Vertical Bd

Vertical Drive Motor M702

Circuit Breakers F701 Vertical Obstacle Switch S704


to F705 Encoder B702 Release Switch U702

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Patient Table Horizontal (PTH) Board


Top Support
Brake, Top Support
Encoder, Pot Motor M710

PTH_
MCB

Safety Table Top


Switches Motor
S711 a & b Table Top M711
Encoder
B711

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Patient Table Vertical (PTV) Board


Vertical Drive
Frequency
How to Program FC Converter
E702
Press the blue program button:
then ↑ or ↓ to select P009

then ↑ or ↓ to select 0003


Vertical
then ↑ or ↓ to select P910 Drive
Motor
then ↑ or ↓ to select 0002 M702

stores and ends program

Reset the System PTV D702


Done when state is `STANDBY’
Use gantry keypads to test

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Water Cooling System (WCS)

IMS/GEN
Supply has
2R5 mounted
behind it

Gantry Supply has 2R2 M2


mounted behind it

Site
M1 Water
Gantry OUT
Return

IMS/GEN
Site Return
Water IN

See WCS Valves

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Cooling Control

WCS LEDS
ON (green) WCS is on (230 Vac from PDS, breaker F13)
SUM ERROR (red) On if 1F2/1F3 is tripped or Temp Error has exceeded time limit
TEMP ERROR (red) On if Gantry air / water, IMS/Gen water, or Chiller water exceeds limits
WCS SWITCHES
CHANNEL SELECT Sequentially selects one of eight temperature conditions that are monitored
ERROR RESET Resets and cancels error status
See adjustment pots

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Cooling Control Board


WCS Cabinet

Adjusts setting for


delay between an over
temperature condition
and system shutdown.
The recommended
amount is 15 minutes.

Adjusts setting for


nominal POWER WCS
water temperature
which is normally
23°C

Adjusts setting for


nominal gantry air
temperature
which is normally
27°C

See Control Panel

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Valves
WCS Cabinet

Fill hoses
completely
before
turning
cooler on to
avoid air in
the system.
Having a
flow sensor
and water
filter on the
site’s water
supply is a
good idea.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Imaging Cabinet (IMS) 24 V Module


Pritzel MOD
Plus 4 Power shown Conn Split
CDROM
See Plus 4 Expert IMS
Fan
Module
Heat Exchanger

PS Power
Hard Fuses Supply
Drives
E105

Temperature
Sensors

SMI

PDS Expert PDS is in Generator

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Expert IMS
View with
top cover
removed
CCI D201
SIAM D21
IMA D70
Oscillator
Gbus D150
Maxicam D66
BJ D83B
AP-D D57
Dummy D160
M4 Xbus D166
I/O D32 or D30
REC D96
Power
vs.
Expert

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

IMS Top Components


Pritzel Box
24V Fiber Optic
Module Option for
Camera
Conn Bd
D206 Split Bd
D204 CDROM
MOD E108 archive
E123 for
patient data, store
updates
adjustment tables
sd6
sd5

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Hard Drives
IMS Cabinet

System Disk
E106
sd0

Store 1
E107
sd1

Space for optional


Store 2
E109
sd3

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

IMS Power Supply (E105)


F5 in PDS protects E105 UA3

K3 in PDS opens if IMS is too hot UA1 pot UA2

F1 & F3 Store 1 & CD


ROM drive

F5 & F7 Store 2 & MOD


drive

F2, F11, & F12 5vdc


breaker for options

F9, F10 12vdc breaker


for options

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

SMI and PDS


IMS Cabinet

SMI

Main
PDS
Fuses

AC-DC power
Supply behind
fuses

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

SMI

CIB D203 Back Projector


(2) D83B

Sparc w/ Array
carrier Processor
NVRAM AP-D D57
MEM
Dummy Bds for
cooling/booting
Video
M4-MOD
256 or 128
Sync Adapter D141 or 142
GBUS D151
MAP D55

SIAM D21 M4-XBUS


D166
Imagers (2)
D70 Data I/O D30

Camera IF D66 SMI REC D96

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

PDS Relays & Fuses


PDS
H1 SERVICE
K1 & K2 PHS Indicator
S1 Enables
power to the
K3 Table but not to
Gantry
K4
H2 SERVICE
EVALUATION
K5 & K6 Indicator
S2 Prevents
Console
F1-Mains SYS_ON
Switch 35A

F2-WCS 6A
450V
F17-
Console
F3- PDS 24V 4A

F4-SMI works w/ K3

F5-IMS PS E105
F16-Table
F6-IMS cooling Power
9-Dehumidifier Supply
F7-Service Outlet 15-Vertical
10-GEN works w/ K5 14-WCS Pump
F8-Gantry & Table 11-Det. Heater Drive
works w/ K6
works w/ K4 Converter
12-Gen 24V 13-WCS Controller

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Generator Cabinet GENERATOR


Plus 4 Power shown
Heat Exchanger E607

See Expert GEN DC Circuit E602 Inverter E603


DCC_CON D650 HV_CON D640
DCC_MCB HVC_MCB
Cap
Bridge
Bank HV Trigger
D651
D652 D641
S1

Fan E605

HV_Acq D642

POWER SUPPLY
E606 HV Tank E604
+5.1V +15V -15V
+24V

Line Input E601


NS Power Control
Relay Bd F1
D670 Relay Theory D670 F9 F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F2 NS
F3
Fuse Theory

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Expert Generator

Power
vs.
Expert

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Generator Tank and Input


DCC and Main Inverter
are located above H1.
Both of these components
have a temperature sensor. H1 Tank or
HV
A heat exchanger for the Transformer
cabinet is located at the
very top.
The two MCB’s in this cabinet:
DCC and HVC
Also monitor temperature

Power
Supply
E606
NS Relay

Relay Board
D670

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

DC Circuit (DCC E602)


Temperature Sensor half way back of asm
Generator Cabinet

DC
Control
Board
D650

MCB (D333)
programmed
as DCC

S1

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Inverter (HVC) E603


Generator Cabinet
Temperature
Sensor

Tube Exposure
Counter not as HV
accurate as Control
software counter Board

MCB
programmed as
HVC
Testpoints
and LEDs

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

H1 Tank & D642


Generator Cabinet

HV Acquisition Board
D642
Use its Test Points to
monitor HV Transformer
output

Dummy Tighten HV cable


Plugs for screws with 2.0 + 0.5
test Nm torque.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Line Input Left


Generator Cabinet Relay Board (D670)

Anode Starter (UDC) Cable

HV Cables

AC input lines

F9 30AF/500V N_UDC
F8 30AF/500V P_UDC
F7 2AF/500V Fan if SN
1513 or older
F6 2AF/500V L3 to DCC
F5 2AF/500V L2 to DCC
F4 2AF/500V L1 to DCC

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Component Locations

Line Input Right


Generator Cabinet

F1 - L1 IN
F2 - L2 IN
F3 - L3 IN

NS Relay
requires
24V from
PDS and
E606

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

Error Codes

Note Only the most common error codes are listed in this EPST.
How to read (example of) the System Logbook
Error Types
00 MCU (Master Control Unit)
10 GPC (Gantry Panel Control)
20 RTC (Rotate and Tilt Control)
30 PTH (Patient Table Horizontal)
40 PTV (Patient Table Vertical)
50 HVC (High Voltage Control)
60 DCC (Direct Current Control)
70 RAC (Rotate Anode Control)
80 FIL (Filament Control)
90 DLP (Detector Diaphragm, Laser, and Focus Deflection (Phi))
A0 ZCO (Collimator Diaphragms control thickness and Z focus)
C0 ACU (Data Acquisition Control)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

How to Read a Plus 4 Logbook


Select System…Logbook
Make sure that at least the “Fatal”, “Error”, and “Warning” buttons are selected, then press “Go”.
If you wish to see a previous day’s listing, press “Day -“ and “Go” until the desired day is displayed.
Example:
28-02-2000 08:23:02.774 SSQ_SCAN_INFO ******* Start scan 3 of patient 123
28-02-2000 08:21:49.944 MAS_E000244 <E 000244> hdlc line open (E 0 2 44 6c f7 0 0)
28-02-2000 08:21:48.303 SSQ_SCAN_INFO ******* Start scan 2 of patient 123
28-02-2000 08:21:47.814 SSQ_SCAN_INFO ******* Start scan 1 of patient 123
28-02-2000 08:21:47.201 SSQ_KEY_PRESSED <START> key was pressed
28-02-2000 08:20:45.822 MAS_E10001a <E 10001a> move error (E 10 0 1a 5 fc 4 0)
28-02-2000 08:20:45.763 SSQ_KEY_RELEASED <MOVE> key was released
28-02-2000 08:20:44.303 MAS_Ea00146 <E a00146> zcontrol failed (E a0 1 46 d 2f 16 0)
28-02-2000 08:20:43.078 SSQ_MODE Load 'Spiral Mediastinum' mode
28-02-2000 08:20:37.938 SSQ_KEY_PRESSED <MOVE> key was pressed
28-02-2000 08:18:03.280 COMMAND: /Mode /Spiral

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

Error Types
There are three types of errors: MAS, SMI_IRS, and IRSDAT.
MAS (master measurement process) is the program that monitors the function controllers.
SMI_IRS, and IRSDAT are programs that monitor the SMI-5 imager and DMS data within the imager.
We are primarily interested in MAS errors because they are by far the most common.
The first two digits in MAS error entries indicate which MCB generated the error.
The last two digits designate the particular error within the controller.

1st Error - A046 zcontrol failed (A0 is the ZCO controller)


Notice the chronological order! The oldest errors are at the bottom.
2nd Error - 101A move error (10 is the GPC controller)

3rd Error - 0044 hdlc line open (00 is the MCU controller)

Use the four-digit code to find the full description and suggested action plan in the error code list.

Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

MCU 00 (Master Control Unit, D301, Left Pedestal)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Code MCU Message Translation Possible Solution


0011 initdone timeou One of the many MCB controllers isn’t Check the following MCBs to make sure their “Cycle” LED’s
responding after it was initialized are blinking: MCU, GPC, RTC, PTH, PTV, HVC, DCC,
RAC, FIL, DLP, ZCO, and ACU.
0015 resetdone timeo One of the many MCB controllers isn’t Check the following MCBs to make sure their “Cycle” LED’s
responding after it was reset are blinking: MCU, GPC, RTC, PTH, PTV, HVC, DCC,
RAC, FIL, DLP, ZCO, & ACU.
0036 scan too short The scan time was much shorter than it was Look at the other errors that happened at the same time as
supposed to be. this one.
0044 hdlc line open The host computer communicates with the Was the Host rebooted?
MCU MCB over a serial communication line Initialize the MCBs, Reset, and go on.
running the hdlc protocol. If communication
between them is interrupted for any reason,
this message is issued.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

GPC 10 (Gantry Panel Control, D311, Right Pedestal)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Code GPC Message Possible Cause Possible Solution


1010 temp_error The air temperature in the gantry went above Check the display panel on WCS for errors and check
35C, sensed by the B303 temperature switch. the water radiator fans in the gantry.
1011 humidity_error The humidity in the gantry got above 70% Check the status LED’s on the E321 dehumidifier, the
PDS F9 breaker and the left pedestal F307 breaker.
1013 panel1_error Problem with left side gantry control panel 1 Initialize the GPC controller again and check its function.
Does the right side control panel (keypad) work?
1014 panel2_error Problem with right side gantry control panel 2 Initialize the GPC controller again and check its function.
Does the left side control panel work?
101a move_error Table horizontal, vertical, or gantry tilt The movement request is simply denied due to safety
movement was requested but the GPC sensed interlocks built into the software. Refer to the
that it would not be safe to the patient or the Theory…Table Range section to verify proper collision
equipment; due to a possible collision between control operation.
them.
101e collision_error The table height, feed, and gantry tilt are Adjust table height, feed, and gantry tilt back to normal
interlocked to make sure the patient is safe. ranges. Refer to the Theory…Table Range section to
The GPC sensed that two or three of these verify proper collision control operation.
were in unsafe areas of movement.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

RTC 20 (Rotate Tilt Control, D301, Left Pedestal)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
2012 ini_fre_timeout Gantry rotation frequency converter E301 not Check the converter’s display panel for error messages
responding to being initialized and make sure it is getting 24 Vdc from the D301 board.
2013 fc_no_response Gantry rotation frequency converter E301 not Check the converter’s display panel for error messages
responding at all and make sure it is getting 24 Vdc from the D301 board.
2022 inifret_timeout Gantry tilt frequency converter E302 not Check the converter’s display panel for error messages
responding to being initialized. and check left pedestal breaker F302 and D324 relay.
2026 gan_door_opened The gantry door was opened when the gantry Check the S304 and S305 door micro-switches for
was rotating. reliable operation.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

PTH 30 (Patient Table Horizontal, D701, Table Top)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Code Message Translation Possible Solution


301a support nothome The table top support was not fully retracted Fully retract the top support to its home position, which is
when the table top tried to feed in. commonly referred to as the ICT mode position.
301b Lifecheck timeo The host tests the functionality of all the Press Reset and try to go on. Check the Comm Pos/Neg
controllers and the speed of the CAN bus by CAN communication bus for reliable operation. Check
sending out sequential time critical messages and clean the CTLDAT slip rings and brushes, that the
called YS. If the messages are not CAN bus travels through.
processed in the expected amount of time,
this error is issued.
301c Supp Poti NotOk Something is wrong with the R710 Top Check the function of the top support using the
Support potentiometer in the table. Service…Test program, check the R710 potentiometer
using an O-scope, or replace it.
301d Top Poti Not Ok Something is wrong with the R711 Table Top Check the function of the tabletop using the
(cradle) potentiometer in the table. Service…Test program, check the R711 potentiometer
using an O-scope, or replace it.
3024 Vertical Block The vertical block switches (S712-715), Make sure the table is not lowered onto a gurney or
located on the outside edges of the top wheelchair. Raise the table and remove object or check
support activated; Table down movement the switches to make sure they are not always on or
and gantry tilting are halted if one of these defective. The vertical drive manual override switches
switches becomes active. (S701-703) at the table base can be used to force the
table up or down, but be careful not to push the table
beyond its physical limitations.
3025 UnallowdTopMove The table top moved when it was supposed Make sure that the Y711 & Y712 electromagnetic
to be braked to a standstill. brakes can hold the table top still. Make sure that 24 Vdc
from the D701 PTH board’s K2 relay is activating the
brakes.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
3027 UnallowdSupMove The top support moved when it was Make sure the Y710 electromagnetic brake can hold the
supposed to be braked to a standstill. top support still. Make sure that 24 Vdc from the D701
PTH board’s K3 relay is activating the brake.
3035 SpeedOutOfRange Table fed too fast or slow. Check table feed function-using Service…Test program.
3036 TopPosDifferenc The table top B711 precision encoder does Use the Service…Adjust…PHSHoriz program to
not match the R711 rough position calibrate the table feed encoders. If this does not fix
potentiometer the problem, then suspect a bad encoder or
potentiometer.
3037 SupPosDifferenc The table top B710 precision encoder does Use the Service…Adjust…PHSHoriz program to
not match the R710 rough position calibrate the table feed encoders. If this does not fix
potentiometer the problem, then suspect a bad encoder or
potentiometer.
3039 TopTrajecNotok The table top did not feed to the correct Remove obstructions and check the Y713 clutch, M711
position. Most likely something got in the motor, and B711 feed encoder.
way or slowed it down.
303a SuppTrajecNotok The top support did not feed to the correct Remove obstructions and check the M710 motor, and
position. Most likely something got in the B710 feed encoder.
way or slowed it down.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

PTV 40 (Patient Table Vertical, D702, Table bottom)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Code Message Translation Possible Solution


401c Vert Blocked The vertical block switches (S712-715), Make sure the table is not lowered onto a gurney or
located on the outside edges of the top wheelchair. Raise the table and remove object or check
support activated; Table down movement the switches to make sure they are not always on or
and gantry tilting are halted if one of these defective. The vertical drive manual override switches
switches becomes active. (S701-703) at the table base can be used to force the
table up or down, but be careful not to push the table
beyond its physical limitations.
4020 unallowed move The vertical position changed when it was Check the B702 vertical position encoder, the M702
supposed to be at a standstill. motor brake, and the Y702 spindle brake.
4028 Frequ Timeout The table’s vertical frequency converter will Reset CT and retry.
not respond. Check display on front of converter.
Check the D702 12 Vdc supply to the converter also.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

HVC 50 (High Voltage Control, D640, Generator)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Code Message Translation Possible Solution


5010 UT > +82 kV The D642 / D640 monitoring boards in the The tube is arcing, the high voltage cables are bad, the high
generator sensed that the positive side kV voltage slip ring brushes are bad, or one of the monitoring
coming out of the high voltage tank went boards is bad. You can connect an o-scope to the +UT_act
above +82kV. and -UT_act test points on D642 or to the UTact test point
on the D640 to monitor the kV.
5011 UT > -82 kV The D642 / D640 monitoring boards in the The tube is arcing, the high voltage cables are bad, the high
generator sensed that the negative side kV voltage slip ring brushes are bad, or one of the monitoring
coming out of the high voltage tank went boards is bad. You can connect an o-scope to the +UT_act
above -82kV. and -UT_act test points on D642 or to the UTact test point
on the D640 to monitor the kV.
5012 UT > UT_nom The total tube voltage, UT_act, sensed by The tube is arcing, the high voltage cables are bad, the high
the D642 / D640 monitoring boards went voltage slip ring brushes are bad, or one of the monitoring
10% over the wish value UT_nom. boards is bad. You can connect an o-scope to the +UT_act
and -UT_act test points on D642 or to the UTact test point
on the D640 to monitor the kV.
5013 UT < UT_nom The total tube voltage, UT_act, sensed by The tube is arcing, the high voltage cables are bad, the high
the D642 / D640 monitoring boards went voltage slip ring brushes are bad, or one of the monitoring
10% under the wish value UT_nom. boards is bad. You can connect an o-scope to the +UT_act
and -UT_act test points on D642 or to the UTact test point
on the D640 to monitor the kV.
5014 IT > IT_nom The total tube current, IT_act, sensed by The tube is arcing, the filaments are being incorrectly heated,
the D642 / D640 monitoring boards went or one of the monitoring boards is bad. You can connect an o-
35% over the wish value IT_nom. scope to the IT_act and IT_nom (wish value) test points on
D640 to monitor the tube current.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes
Code HVC Message Translation Possible Solution
5015 IT < IT_nom The total tube current, IT_act, sensed byThe tube is arcing, the filaments are being incorrectly heated,
the D642 / D640 monitoring boards went or one of the monitoring boards is bad. You can connect an o-
35% under the wish value IT_nom. scope to the IT_act and IT_nom (wish value) test points on
D640 to monitor the tube current.
5018 UDC_ok_failed The UDC_ok signal from the D650 DCC Problem in the cap bank circuit, or the RAC circuit is causing
board changed states indicating that the the DC voltage to not be stable. You can connect an 0-scope
cap bank voltage was no longer within to the UDC_act test point on the D650 board to monitor cap
tolerance. bank voltage during exposure.
5028 short_inverter The cap bank voltage suddenly went low The tube is arcing, the DCC inverter frequency is too high
during exposure, which is indicative of two (check incoming mains power), or a thyristor in the DCC
bridge thyristors turning on at the same inverter is shorted out.
time, causing a short across the cap bank.
502e 24V IGN in INIT 24 vdc from the E606 power supply Most likely the Stop circuit was tripped. If not then the
passes through the D670 boards’ K5 & K3 UDC_ok or W1_Enable signal changed states, or the
relays to provide high voltage inverter E606 24 Vdc power supply failed.
trigger power. If the K5 relay opens (UDC
error), or the K3 relay opens (Stop Report
loop tripped), or the 24 vdc from the E606
DC power supply fails, the D640 senses it.
5046 IT >IT_nom Dose The total tube current, IT_act, sensed by The tube is arcing, the filaments are being incorrectly heated,
the D642 / D640 monitoring boards went the dose measurement circuit is bad (D572, Phi-Psd, or D555
35% over the wish value IT_nom when the Phi-Amp board), or one of the monitoring boards is bad. You
XRS D572 Filament Control board was in can connect an o-scope to the IT_act & IT_nom (wish value)
Dose Control mode. test points on D640 to monitor the tube current yourself.
5047 IT <IT_nom Dose The total tube current, IT_act, sensed by The tube is arcing, the filaments are being incorrectly heated,
the D642 / D640 monitoring boards went the dose measurement circuit is bad (D572, Phi-PSD, or D555
35% under the wish value IT_nom when Phi-Amp board), or one of the monitoring boards is bad. You
the XRS D572 Filament Control board was can connect an o-scope to the IT_act & IT_nom (wish value)
in Dose Control mode. test points on D640 to monitor the tube current yourself.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

DCC 60 (Direct Current Circuit, D650, Generator)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
6015 UDC_act<UDC_nom The cap bank voltage, UT_act, sensed by Either capacitors are blown in the cap bank, the mains
the D650 board, went 10% under the wish input power is not stable, the inverter charging circuit
value UT_nom. shorted, the RAC caused the stabilized voltage to become
unstable, or the D650 board is bad. You can connect an 0-
scope to the UDC_act test point on the D650 board and
compare it to the UDC_nom (wish value) test point to
monitor cap bank voltage during anode boost and then
during exposure.
6016 UDC timeout war The cap bank voltage was held on longer Initialize and reset the CT. Reload the mode and try
than anticipated by the scan mode another scan.
parameters.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

RAC 70 (Rotate Anode Control, D95, Gantry Rot)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.

Code Message Translation Possible Solution


7010 lifecheck_timeo The host tests the functionality of all the Press Reset and try to go on. Check the Comm Pos/Neg
controllers and the speed of the CAN bus by CAN communication bus for reliable operation. Check
sending out sequential time critical messages and clean the CTLDAT slip rings and brushes that the
called YS. If the messages are not processed CAN bus travels through.
in the expected amount of time, this error is
issued.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

FIL 80 (Filament Control, D572, Gantry XRS)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
8013 DAC Y_fil error Y_fil is the analog signal that drives filament If this message came without accompanying If_lim or
inverter frequency. A higher Y_fil equals If_act max/min errors, then the D572 was trying to drive
more filament heating. If Y_fil deviates far filament current high or low without results; which might
from normal the D572’s A/D converter indicate a filament problem or the D572 is simply bad.
senses it and issues the error message. If it came with If_lim or If_act errors then refer to those
messages. Running Service…Adjust…FilAdapt to
adapt the filaments to aging, or
Service…Adjust…Voltage to do a full kV and mA
calibration on the tube, may also help.
8014 DAC I_f_lim err The FIL_CON board has a limit (If_lim) to The D572 FIL_CON board or its D333 MCB is defective.
how high it wants to drive the filaments; Swap the FIL_CON’s MCB with another MCB and
which varies according to filament size and reflash to isolate problem.
scan mode parameters. This set point failed (Do not reflash the ZCO_MCB!!)
to remain stable.
8026 I_f_min The FIL_CON board has upper and lower The tube filaments might have opened, the negative
absolute limit that the actual filament current damping resistor filament wiring might be open, the
I_f_act can be. It the If_act goes below 2 325vdc went too low, or the D572 FIL_CON board is
amps this error is issued. bad.
8029 Fil cur limited The FIL_CON board has a limit (If_lim) to The actual filament current went too high, the If_lim set
how high it wants to drive the filaments; point was set too low, or the set point is not stable. This
which varies according to filament size and could be caused by incorrect dose reporting, low tube
scan mode parameters. When the actual output, unstable 325vdc, or bad D572 board. Run the
filament current (If_act) exceeds this limit, the program Service…Adjust…FilAdapt to adapt the
_F_lim error is issued. filaments to aging, or Service…Adjust…Voltage to fully
tune kV and mA values

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

DLP 90 (Delphi Controller, D573, Gantry XRS)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
9021 phi_tube_arcing The FOC_MON sensor, mounted under the Getter (heat soak) the tube and see if it that will stop the
port of the tube, can sense the actual amount arcing. The E556 Foc_Mon, D555 Phi_amp, or the D573
of dose coming out of the tube. It reports this DelPhi board may be bad, but it is unlikely.
value to the D573 DelPhi board, where it is
compared against a minimum expected
dose value (Dose_min). If the actual dose
suddenly drops below the expected
minimum, it is reported as a tube arc to the
DelPhi.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

ZCO A0 (Z Control, D574, Gantry XRS)


Note Only the most common errors are listed in this EPST.
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
A026 zmon1_outoftol The detector D585 ZMON_2 sensor sends The D585 Zmon_2 board is probably going bad, or
two outputs to the D574 Zcon board, which possibly, the A/D converter on the D574 is going bad. You
are used to determine Z direction beam can view this signal at the D574’s S1 test point. It should
position. One of the outputs, zmon_1, is be in the range of –2v to +6v depending on the selected
bad. mode.
A027 zmon2_outoftol The detector D585 ZMON_2 sensor sends The D585 Zmon_2 board is probably going bad, or possibly,
two outputs to the D574 Zcon board, which the A/D converter on the D574 is going bad. You can view
are used to determine Z direction beam this signal at the D574’s S2 test point. It should be in the
position. One of the outputs, zmon_2, is range of –2v to +6v depending on the selected mode.
bad.
A028 ZMON_notok When the D574 Zcon board is initialized, it The D585 or D574 board is bad. Replace the D585 board
runs a self-test, which includes testing the first since it degrades with age.
D585 Zmon_2 sensor and input section of
the D574. If the test fails, this message is
issued.
A038 unexpected move The D574 Zcon board sensed that one or One of the encoders (G1/E1 or G2/E2), the D555 Phi_Amp
both of the tube collimator’s leaves / board, or the D574 Zcon board is bad. It is also possible
encoders moved when they should not that the physical mechanics of the tube collimator are
have. loose.
A03d no xray The D574 Zcon board senses xrays using Something may be attenuating the beam, the dose may be
the programmable gain D585 PSD sensor low, the D585 may not be properly positioned or calibrated
circuit that is mounted on the outside edge (Service…Adjust…ZmonCal), the D585 or the D574 may be
of the detector. If the D574 gets low or no bad. Try initializing the D574 and see if it will pass its own
output from the D585, it issues this internal self tests first.
message.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes
Code Message Translation Possible Solution
A03e Z_not_active The D574 Zcon board senses xrays using The scan aborted quickly, something may have been in the
the programmable gain D585 PSD sensor beam, the dose may be low, the D585 may not be properly
circuit that is mounted on the outside edge positioned or calibrated (Service…Adjust…ZmonCal), the
of the detector. If a scan was started and D585 or the D574 may be bad. Try initializing the D574 and
the D574 got low or no output from the see if it will pass its own internal self tests first.
D585 this message is issued.
A046 zcontrol failed The D574 Zcon board uses the D585 The dose is low, there’s a mechanical problem with the tube
Zmon_2 board to sense the beam profile as diaphragm, or the D574 or D585 board is bad. Try
it lays across the detector in the Z direction. initializing the D574 so it will run its own self test, run
The D585 is mounted on the edge of the Service…Adjust…FilAdapt to adapt the filaments to aging,
detector. If the beam profile moves beyond or run Service…Adjust…Voltage to fully tune KV and MA
expectations, this message is issued. values.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Error Codes

ACU C0 (Acquisition Control Unit, D513, Gantry DMS)


Code Message Translation Possible Solution
C031 das_temp_too_hi If the air inside the DAS box Check gantry temperature, DAS cooling fans (E501),
rises above 50C, a thermal switch and the DAS thermal switch on the E500/D500
activates and sets the Temp_Err signal that (IC Detector) / E500/D505 (UFC) detector.
goes to the ACU_1, ACU_2, and Analog
Power Unit (APU). This condition will cause
the APU to turn off, removing power to the
DAS.
C033 det_temp_error APPLIES ONLY TO UFC DETECTOR. APPLIES ONLY TO UFC DETECTOR.
The solid state UFC detector has three Check the D504’s F1 fuse, the temperature sensors,
heaters and three temperature sensors. the 230 Vac source to the D504 (PDS F11 breaker/K3
This message comes if the D504 board relay, Z306 filter in left pedestal, and the DMS
cannot control the detector’s temperature. slip ring brushes

C045 missing_ap The RTC uses angular pulses (AP) from a Usually this is caused by debris caught in the slotted
rotating slotted ring and light barrier board ring, or the light barrier board is not correctly
(LPS D302) to determine rotation position aligned. First, clean the AP slotted ring and make
and speed. These pulses, fed over the sure the RTC AP LEDs blink properly. Second, realign
Ctl_Dat slip rings, are combined with the the D302. Third, clean the Ctl_Dat slip rings. Lastly,
das data going to the SMI to establish replace the D513 ACU_2 board.
correct image presentation. The ACU_2
board has an angle pulse monitoring circuit
that detects if any of these pulses are
missing.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Functional Checks

Power XC Box Connectors


PDS Connectors (UPS safety info) Rotating Anode Control (RAC)
MCU Generator Power Supply (E606)
RTC GEN Direct Current Circuit (DCC)
GPC GEN HV Control Board (D640) LEDs
Data Acquisition Power Levels (APU) GEN HV Control Board Test Points
ACU_1 GEN HV Acquisition Board (D642)
ACU_2 HVC Tests
WCS Thermal and Electrical Status HVCO1 Test: General High-Voltage Test
WCS Water Circuit IMS Power Supply
WCS Fuses, Sensors and Connectors Computer Interface Board (CIB)
GAN_R Power Distribution (D575) SMI
Trafo Unit (E535) SIAM
Digital Power Unit (DPU E530) Table Testpoints Switches and Encoders
XC Filament Control (FIL_CON D572) How to Scan in Customer Mode
XC DELPHI (D573) How to Film
XC Z_CON (D574) UPS
Refer to PM section for more checks

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Power
Lack of power can be the result of over temperature conditions as well as tripped breakers and bad or
overloaded power sources.
Refer to Console Power Diagram
Refer to Console Power Button Theory
Refer to IMS Power Supply Functional Checks
Locate PDS fuses and relays
Locate gantry Left Pedestal fuses and relays
Refer to gantry Power Distribution Diagram
Refer to gantry DPU Functional Checks
Refer to gantry APU Functional Checks
Locate gantry Trafo fuses
Refer to Table Power Diagram
Locate WCS error messages
Refer to WCS adjustment
Locate Generator Components
Refer to HV Generation Logic Diagram
Refer to Generator Power Supply Functional Checks
Check the UPS

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

PDS Connectors
Conn Panel Purpose .
X250 Right Keyboard SYS and EVA ON switches/lamps, IMS Temperature [F3/24 Vdc]
X251 Front Mains AC line input [Fused at room panel/380-480 Vac]
X252 Right Container (Option) [F11/230 Vac]
X253 Right Console [F17/230 Vac]
X254 Right SMI and Host [F5/230 Vac], IMS Heat exchanger [F6/230 Vac]
X257 Right Table [F15, F16/230 Vac], Gantry L1-3: [F8/400 Vac], Dehumidifier: [F9/230 Vac] (*)
X258 Right Generator E606 DC power supply [F10/230 Vac]
X259 Right Generator external 24 Vdc supply [F12/24 Vdc], Gen. Temperature Monitoring
X260 Right Water cooling system pump power [F13/450 Vac (60 Hz) or 400 Vac (50 Hz)]
X261 Front PDS internal jumper block. Configures how WCS powers on [F3/24 Vdc]
X262 Front PDS internal jumper block. Mains 50 Hz/60 Hz freq adaptation [F1, F2/400-450 Vac]
X263 Right Relay contacts to signal external equipment (chillers, cameras) when to turn on.
X264 Right Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) wiring in point.
PDS Configuration Jumpers
X261 Water Cooling System Power On Control
Pin 1 – 2 WCS on when SYS ON pushed but off when EVA ON pushed (Plus 4 Expert)
Pin 2 – 3 WCS on when SYS ON or EVA ON is pressed (Plus 4 Power)
X262 Mains Line Input 50 Hz / 60 Hz Frequency Adaptation
Pins 1–2, 4–5, 7–8 Sets CT for 50 Hz mains supply input voltage (Europe).
Pins 2–3, 5–6, 8–9 Sets CT for 60HZ mains supply input voltage (USA).
X264 UPS Interconnection Point (Console and IMS Power)
UPS Installed: Pins 3 and 1 (230 Vac L1 and Neutral) go to the input of a UPS and pins 4 and 5 are the stabilized
voltage returning from the UPS; if not Installed: Pin 3 is shorted to 4 and pin 1 is shorted to pin 5.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

MCU
The Master Controller Unit in the gantry’s left pedestal command the twelve MCB’s that control the scanner. The
FRU that holds it also contains the circuitry and controller for gantry Rotate and Tilt functions.
LEDs
XCEN_Rot green Conditions in rotating part of gantry are OK to enable xray
XrayOnRot green Minimum X-ray dose detected by the Xray System in rotating part of gantry
SyncLost red Transmission or synchronization CAN error; timing mismatch detected
RecErr red Parity error detected by the receive logic of the MCU or ACU2.
StopSCSfirst Stationary gantry has opened the STOP-report loop first. (MCU)
StopSCRfirst Rotating gantry has opened the STOP-report loop first. (ACU_2)
CYCLE blinking CAN bus is working

Power Reset
1 All MCB's CYCLE LEDs change from constant ON to blinking
2 Stop Hold All MCB's initialize
3 Each MCB STOP LED goes out if its parameters loaded and version verified
4 Stop Report Closed The Stop Report circuit is closed when every MCB is ready
5 Stop Closed All MCB's have verified their parameters are good; the scanner is up.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

RTC
The RTC has several LEDs, switches and testpoints useful for servicing the rotate and tilt functions.
ROTATE MODE
LEDs Color Significance Testpoints
AP0 green AP0 pulse received from LPS Each pulse=1/4 degree Testpoint: X37
AP90 green AP90 pulse received from LPS Testpoint: X38
Index green Index pulse received from LPS Occurs when tube between 1 and 2 o’clock Testpoint: X39
CYCLE green Blinking: the RTC MCB is working. ON: system control is halted
RTC V1 Rotate Brake is ON
SERVICE RTC yellow RTC is in Service Mode
LCD can show you current scanner mode, system state, firmware version, Key Controls, last error code.
Position: Number of Angular pulses from Index pulse shown as a hexadecimal
Time: Number of microseconds required to rotate one degree and shown as a hexadecimal. So convert to decimal
and multiply by 360 to get scan time of one revolution.
RTC Switches
Switch Name Function LED
S1 Service RTC Service mode ON/OFF LED on: Service Mode is on
S2 Key1: rotates CW in Rotate Mode and tilts forward when in service TILT MODE M6
S3 Key2: rotates CCW in Rotate Mode and tilts backward when in service TILT MODE M6
S4 Tilt Brake: Release tilt brake LED on: Tilt brake is released
S5 Mode Key Hold to display info and select modes: NoMode, Offset, Static, RotMod, Topo, Spiral, Test

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

GPC
LEDs indicate PSS E303 power supplies 5V; 12V; 24V are present on GPC
Switches
S 10 Moves table horizontally, negative/toward gantry.
S 13 Moves table vertically, negative/upward.
S 12 Moves table vertically, positive/downward.
S 03 Moves table horizontally, positive/away from gantry.
S 01 Tilts gantry positive/ forward
S 02 Tilts gantry negative/ backward
S 20 Moves patient from outer light marker to scan slice position.
S 21 Moves table away from gantry for patient loading or unloading.
S 30 Switches light markers on/off.
S 23 Sets current horizontal table position to zero.
S 31 KEYTEST
Tests System must be in STANDBY Mode meaning CAN bus working
0637 Adjust Horizontal Position
0645 Adjust Vertical Position
0647 Test Horizontal Motor Brake
0648 Test Vertical Spindle Brake
0675 Test Vertical A/D Converter

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Data Acquisition Power Levels (APU)


APU inputs comes from X4 and X5 outputs of the Trafo Unit to the two connectors at the top of the APU.
Power should be within 5% of indicated level.
If the thermoswitch D505 detects DAS temperature is more than 50°C, the APU power is disabled.
DAS Power Levels (X4)
UA4: +5 Vdc to the integrator boards in slots 1-24
UA5: +5 Vdc to the integrator boards in slots 24-48
UA6: +15 Vdc to all the integrator boards - slots 1-48
The connector at the bottom, X4, goes to the DAS

C-Box Power Levels (X3)


UA7: +5 Vdc to the C-Box
UA3: -5 Vdc to the C-Box
UA2: -15 Vdc to the C-Box
UA1 +15 Vdc to the C-Box
The connector at the bottom, X3, goes to the C-box

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

ACU_1
The ACU_1 of the DMS controls the ADC's with timing signals, addresses the integrator boards, starts and stops the
data measurement words, controls DMS transmission to the SMI, and processes the DOSIS_MON signals. It also
monitors the DAS temperature sensor. It can generate test data.
LEDs
CONT_MAN continuous data acquisition is not used for service.
PAT_MAN test data is not used for service.
5V_D + 5V from DPU ( US6) present.
5V A + 5V from APU ( UA3) present.
SCAN Scanner is acquiring Measurement Data.
ERR DATA ERROR, possible causes: ADC, ACU_1, ACU 2, backplane.
TRA TRANSMIT, data is being sent to SMI
AZC Auto-Zero Cycle is a scan prep; goes off during scan

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

ACU_2
The ACU_2 of the DMS controls CAN communication, Stop Report Loop, and Time Critical Control signals between
the MCU and Rotating Gantry components. This transfer must occur through the Control Slip Rings (SLR). The
ACU_2 monitors AP rotation pulses and Horizontal Table Pulses as it controls the overall DMS process.∙
LEDs
CYCLE: Blinks while ACU_MCB is running
STOP: ON if the scanner or itself is in a Stopped condition.
When one controller detects a STOP condition, all controllers are Stopped.
The STOP LED remains ON until the MCU_MCB closes the STOP-Report loop.
SCAN: ON when acquiring scan data.
ROT (SCR) FIRST: STOP initiated from a controller inside the Control Slip Rings (ACU D513) rotating
STAT (SCS) FIRST STOP initiated from a controller outside the Control Slip Rings (MCU D301) stationary
(If STAT FIRST and ROT FIRST respond within 15 ms of each other, it cannot be traced to either one exclusively.)
+ 24V + 24V from DPU present.
+ 5V + 5V from DPU present.
Measurement Points
+ 24.1 V from DPU (± 500 mV) Adjust at US5 on the front plate of the DPU.
+ 5.2 V from DPU (± 50 mV) Adjust at US6 on the front plate of the DPU.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Water Cooling System


Use the Control Box at the top of the WCS Cabinet to check system cooling and adjust time until shutdown. The
SUM LED lights after the Delay time has passed following an over temperaure condition. The TEMP LED lights if a
temperature error is still present. Channels 1 to 8 can be selected using the CHANNEL SELECT button.
Channel LCD Display Explanation
1 AIR nom xx.x c Air temperature in gantry ( nominal value )
2 WAT act xx.x c Temperature of gantry cooling water ( actual value )
3 AIR act xx.x c Air temperature in gantry ( actual value )
4 HST nom xx.x c Temperature of host (site) cooling water ( nominal value ) informational only
5 HST act xx.x c Temperature of host cooling water ( actual value ) informational only
6 CEN act xx.x c Temperature of central (site) water supply ( actual value )
7 ERR delay xx m Delay time for temperature error ( pre-selected, usually 15 ) minutes
8 GAN_pump OFF Gantry pump stopped because gantry not powered (says RUN when ON )
If there is an error, the display flashes.
LCD Display Explanation
E1 PUMP_GANTRY Internal fuse for WCS water pump M1 to gantry opened due to over load
E2 PUMP_HOST Internal fuse for WCS water pump M2 to IMS/GEN opened due to over load
E3 T_CENT_nn. c Temperature of central water supply at time of error
Check Water Circuits
E4 T_GANT_nn. c Temperature of gantry cooling water at time of error
E5 T_HOST_nn. c Temperature of IMS/GEN cooling water at time of error Check Mechanicals

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

WCS Water Circuits


You should check water pressure occassionally to verify it is approximately 2.0 bar with the pumps off.
If water leaks from the system, you will want to fix this and refill.
If air gets into the hoses, the system cannot cool sufficiently. You should refill the hoses.
There are small valves on the front of the WCS to transfer water into or out of the closed loop systems. Use a
small jumper hose between the small valves and the hospital cold water supply. No special additives are required
or recommended to be added to this water circulating in the closed loop.
You need to drain the hoses to replace M1 or M2 motors, Spirovent bleeder valves, magnetic valves, expansion
vessels and shut off valves. You do NOT need to drain the hoses for a permanent bleeder valve replacement, coil
for magnetic valve, adjustment motors M3 or M4, nor for temperature sensors 2R2, 2R4, 2R5.

Check WCS messages

Check Mechanicals

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

WCS Fuses, Sensors and Connectors


Fuses
1F1 24 Vac supply to controller, valve motors, and solenoids located one foot left of WCS control board
1F2 Overcurrent protection for 1M1 pump motor (Gantry) mounted on the motor power relay 2K1
1F3 Overcurrent protection for 1M2 pump motor (IMS/Gen) if Plus 4 Power mounted on motor power relay 2K2
Sensors
1R1 B304 air temperature sensor mounted in the gantry
2R2 Gantry water temp sensor. Mounted on 3rd pipe from left (outlet)
2R4 Hosp chilled water supply sensor. Mounted on 1st pipe from left (inlet)
2R5 IMS/Gen water temp sensor. Mounted on 4th pipe from left (outlet)

Conn Purpose
X901 3 phase 400/450vac pump power, single phase 230vac controller power, WCS_ON1/2
X902 WCS_ERROR signal to Gantry MCU, COOL_CNT signal to Gantry B304 temp sensor
1X6 Free standing relay contacts that close when either pump is on (1A, 230 Vac max)
1X14 24 Vac from 1T1 transformer multi connection point
1x15 0 Vac from 1T1 transformer multi connection point
1X1 400/450 Vac to 1M1 (gantry) pump
1X2 400/450 Vac to 1M2 (IMS/Gen) pump Check Water Circuits
2X3 Gantry water valve drive signals
2X5 IMS/Generator water valve drive signals
2X10 2Y1 solenoid valve (chiller water shutoff) drive signals Check WCS messages
2X11 2Y2 solenoid valve (chiller water bypass) drive signals

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Power Distribution (D575)


D575 in the XC Box is the first to receive the 230 Vac from the Power Slip Rings. It supplies the Trafo Unit and the
DPU with 230 Vac. It creates the +325 Vdc needed for Filament Control. It provides the 24 V dc for rotating fans.
Fuses
The AC input to D575 is covered by F1 (2.5AT/150V) on the D575.
The +24V output for XC Box FAN, RAC box FAN is protected with F2 (1AT/250V) on the D575.
The 325 Vdc output for the FIL_CON is covered by F3 (4AFF/500V) This fuse is located on the component side of
the board. If the fuse is defective, remove the D575 board to replace the fuse. Wait at least a minute after turning
power off to allow power to discharge before you pull D575.
LED/Displays
Voltage indicators on D575 for 5, 15 and 24 volt levels indicate DPU (E530) voltages not D575 outputs.
Use potentiometers on the E530 DPU to adjust these DPU voltages.
Label Indicates What Voltage
V1 ( left ) on Voltage ok US3 / + 15V P_15_DPU
V1 ( right ) on Voltage ok US4 / -15V N_15_DPU
V2 ( left ) on Voltage ok US5 / + 24V P_24_DPU
V2 ( right ) on Voltage ok US1 / + 5V F_5_1_DPU
V3, V4 on Voltage ok US7 / + 325V P325_FIL_PWR ( +325V for FIL_CON D572 )
Switches
S1 Switches the power supply DPU E530 and +325V for FIL_PWR ( P 325_FIL PWR ) on/off.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Trafo Unit (E535)


The Trafo receives 230 VAC from D575 POWER DISTRIBUTION. It supplies the Tube Pump E590, the Detector
HV D40 or heater, the APU E540, and the C Box FAN E511 and the DAS FANS Regulator D507.

Output What Comments


X2 230 VAC for Tube Pump cannot be adjusted
X3 230 VAC for D40 DHV board cannot be adjusted
X4 10.5 and 19.5 VAC to APU X2
X5 9, 9.5, 19, 19.5 VAC to APU X1
X6 24V to Data Acquisition fans cannot be adjusted. Protected by F11. Measure at connections for the
C-Box fan (E511 ) or the DAS Fans Regulator (E507)

See Trafo Fuse Descriptions

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Digital Power Unit (DPU E530)


DPU input comes from X4 output (230 Vac) of D575 POWER DISTRIB on XC Box.
DPU outputs to the XC Box backplane are monitored by the destination MCB’s: RAC, DLP, ZCO, FIL
Under LOAD Voltage settings (except DPU US2 of course)
Label Voltage Measurement Points Voltage Setting Potentiometer
US1 +5V D575 PWR_DIS/X10.2 ( + ) +5.05 V ± 50 mV DPU ADJ / US1
X12.2(RTN)
US2 * - 5V E530 DPU/X4.1 ( - ) - 5.10 V + 50 mV DPU ADJ / US2
E530 DPU/X4.5( RTN )
US3 +15V D575 PWR_DIS/X11.1(+·) +15.10 V + 150 mV DPU ADJ / US3
X13.1( RTN )
US4 -15V D575 PWR_DIS/X11.2(- ) - 15.10 V + 150 mV DPU ADJ / US4
X13.2(RTN)
US5 +24V D575 PWR_DIS/X10.1(+) +24.10 V ± 500 mV DPU ADJ / US5
X12.1( RTN )
or
D513 ACU_2 (+24V)
US6 +5V D513 ACU_2 (+5V) +5.10 V + 50 mV DPU ADJ / US6
D513 X51.1( RTN )

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Filament Control (FIL_CON D572)


Filament Circuit controls tube filament current so it regulates dose. It also switches large and small focus.
LEDs
STOP red ON, when a STOP is initiated by the MCB ( D333 ) on the FIL_CON ( D572 ).
CYCLE green Blinking while the FIL_MCB clock is running. ON continuously when CAN is HALTED.
If_min red ON, when the filament current is less than 2A - will turn off filament heating
If_max red ON, when the filament current is over 9A - will turn off filament heating
FOC_1 yellow ON, when the small focus is selected.
J_CON yellow ON, when dose regulation is active (SCAN EXECUTE).
X_RAY green ON, signal from DELPHI when radiation is on (SCAN EXECUTE).
DR_EN green ON, when the Filament Inverter is ENABLED.
T3_ON Trigger pulses for the Filament Inverter
Test Points
∙ X RAY Dose present, radiation on (0V active )
∙ J CON Dose rate regulation on (0V active )
∙ J_act Actual dose rate (0-10 V ) refer to test FIL03.
∙ F_inv Trigger frequency for the filament inverter (8.8 kHz-44 kHz )
∙ Is_act Oscillating current, actual value (1 V = 1.5 A)
∙ If_act Filament current, actual value (1 V = 1.5 A) (Refer to Service… Tests… Ganrot… FIL 01 – 03)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

DELPHI (D573)
The DELPHI and its DLP_MCB monitor and control the Detector diaphragm, Laser lights, and Phi focus.
The DELPHI also monitors tube temperature, pressure, and arcing.
LEDs
LED Label Color Definition Normal State
STOP Red STOP initiated by DLP_MCB Off
CYCLE Green CAN bus running if blinking; ON=STOP blinking
XRAY Green ON when radiation is on; corresponds to ACU_2 SCAN signal
DEFL Green ON when focus deflection is active
24V Green +24V (US5). Measurement point: XC-Box / D575/ X1 PIN 1 Tolerance: +24.1 V ± 500mV off
MSG Green In Service Mode, indicates DLP firmware parameters in error off
SER Green ON when service switch S1 is in Service Mode
INDEX Green ON when tube collimator PHI_AMP generates a Service pulse for positioning
Test Points
FOCACT: Actual feedback signal from the PHI-PSD (position sensitive device)
FOCREF: Wish value for focus regulation circuit
SUM: Sums Foc_Mon U1 and U2; indicates radiation intensity; when greater than 0.5V, XRAY is ON
DEV: Difference between the wish and actual values for focus deflection
TRG: Trigger output signal from the MCB D333. Not used for service.
XRAY: “Xrays Are On” two state signal for DMS, Filament Board, and Z Control board
AGND: Analog ground for referencing the analog signals
DGND: Digital ground for referencing the XRAY & TRG signals
Switches
S1 Switches the DELPHI Service Mode UP=on DN=off, used to test/adjust detector diaphragm.
S4 Stores detector diaphragm service adjustment

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Z_CON (D574)
The Z_CON sets the collimator diaphragm for the prescribed thickness before the scan.
It regulates the beam position in the Z direction during the scan using the second collimator diaphragm.
It monitors the DPU power levels that supply the XC Box for X-ray Control.
LEDs
STOP (Red) On when Z_CON board MCB initiated a STOP condition
CYCLE (Green) Blinks when MCB is running
RDY1 (Green) On when the M1 motor has reached its desired position
RDY2 (Green) On when the M2 motor has reached its desired position
5V (Green) On when +5 vdc is present (US1 power supply)
24V (Green) On when +24 vdc motor power is present (US5 power supply)
+15 (Green) On when +15 vdc is present (US3 power supply)
-15 (Green) On when –15 vdc is present (US4 power supply)
Test Points
X4_1 S1 Actual radiation intensity at ZMON_1, use AGND, voltage should be from –2 to 6 V
X5_1 S2 Actual radiation intensity at ZMON_2, use AGND, voltage should be from –2 to 6 V
X6_1 PHI Actual Dose from DELPHI – compare it with the ZMON values S1 and S2, if less is detected than
generated, something is blocking the beam.
D1: Detector PSD radiation feedback signal, subtracted
D2: Detector PSD radiation feedback signal, subtracted
TRG: Trigger output signal from the MCB D333. Normally high. Low when error.
AGND: Analog ground for referencing the analog signals
GND: Digital ground for referencing control signal states
Switches
S1 SER UP will activate the two collimator motors until the PHI_AMP produces an Index pulse

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

XC Box Connectors
XC SIDE 1 D571 CONNECTORS
X2 W558 Tube Temperature and Pressure
X3 W572 Tube Collimator Motors
X4 W571 Tube Collimator Encoders
X5 W580 LIMA_R_1-4 Lightmarkers
X6 W570 RAC Box
XC SIDE 2 D576 CONNECTORS
X3 W588 Detector Z_MON D585 Board
X4 W585 Detector Diaphragm Encoder
X5 W586 Detector Diaphragm Motor
X6 W507 CAN Bus and Stop Report Loop to DMS ACU_2 Board D513
X7 W506 Control Signals (Xray on, Arcing, …)DMS ACU_2 Board D513
XC BACKPLANE D570 CONNECTORS
X1 W537 +5/+15/-15/+24 Vdc from DPU (On Left Side of XC-Box)
X4 W555 Tube Filaments, Large and Small (On Left Side of XC-Box)
X5 W545 Ground Wire (On Left Side of XC-Box)
X2 W557 Tube Focus Deflection Coil (On Right Side of XC-Box)
X16 W548 Ground Wire (On Right Side of XC-Box)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Rotating Anode Control (RAC)


LEDs
Label Color Definition Normal State
V10 Not used
TEST green ON when RAC MCB is running test
BRAKE green ON when anode brake is on
MOD green ON when Inverter Drivers triggered
POST green Blinks when anode is rotating
START green Blinks when anode is accelerating
DECEL green Blinks when anode is decelerating
ENABLE green On when the Inverter is enabled
STOP red STOP initiated by RAC MCB on D95 Off
CYCLE green CAN bus running if blinking; ON=HALT blinking
Testpoints
SHORT Signal goes to zero for a short time if the inverter shorts out.
UDC DC supply voltage from the generator through the slip rings. 1V=100 Vdc.
(Refer to table T6B for expected voltage levels)
F.REQ Anode rotation frequency wish value. Active during acceleration.
F.REM Anode rotation frequency actual value. Should stay within +10% to –5% of the REQ
300HZ Not used in field service.
I.00 Actual current of first inverter power phase (.1Volt=1Amp)
I.01 Actual current of second inverter power phase (.1Volt=1Amp)
I.02 Actual current of third inverter power phase (.1Volt=1Amp)
AGND Analog ground for referencing the analog signals
GND Digital ground for referencing control signal states
Switches
RST Reset pushbutton. Resets the D95 MCB.
SW1 Not used in service

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Generator Power Supply (E606)


The breaker for the generator power supply is F10 in the PDS.
5.10 ± 0.10 V supplies DCC and HVC
-15.0 ± 0.3 V supplies DCC and HVC
+15 ± 0.3 V supplies DCC and HVC
24.0 ± 2.4 V voltage for Relay Board and HV Trigger ignition stages
230 VAC + 23/-58 main power from PDS L3

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Direct Current Circuit (DCC)


LED Label Color Definition
NS-ON yellow NS Relay switched ON because 24V loop from PDS present enabling Site AC power (Ll,.L2,.L3) to enter
Generator
Fire Relay green Fire relay K1 switched on +15 V to ignite the Bridge thyristors
UDC ok yellow From DCC_MCB to HVC_MCB: UDC OK so enable Main Inverter
Discharge yellow Discharging active, capacitor bank is discharging
Mains Rot red Wrong rotating field (Ll.L2.L3 IN not well connected)
Mains Phase red Phase is missing (Ll.L2.L3 IN)
Error +15 red +15V DC is less than 11 V
Error -15V red -15V DC magnitude less than 11 V
UDC 600V red Actual DC voltage is greater than 600 V
UDCACT<UNOM red UDC actual is less than 90% of UDC nominal
V 12 G1 green Ignition pulses for the thyristors on the D651 DCC Bridge board
V 12 G2 green Ignition pulses for the thyristors on the D651 DCC Bridge board
V 34 G1 green Ignition pulses for the thyristors on the D651 DCC Bridge board
V 34 G2 green Ignition pulses for the thyristors on the D651 DCC Bridge board
V 56 G1 green Ignition pulses for the thyristors on the D651 DCC Bridge board
V 56 G2 green Ignition pulses for the thyristors on the D651 DCC Bridge board
STOP red STOP LED remains ON until the MCU_MCB closes the STOP-Report loop.
CYCLE green Flashing when MCB is running. ON continuously when MCB is HALTED.
DCC Test Points
UDC_nom Nominal UDC value of the capacitor bank (1V=100V)
UDC_act Actual UDC value of the capacitor bank (1V=100V)
SDCC Start DCC thyristor ignition pulse (0V active)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

GEN HV Control Board (D640) LEDs

LED Label Color Definition


X-RAY green High voltage present UTact > 20kV
UT > UTNOM yellow Actual tube voltage is more than 10% greater than
nominal
UT < UTNOM yellow Actual tube voltage is more than 10% less than
nominal
IT > ITNOM yellow Actual tube current is more than 20% greater than
nominal
IT < ITNOM yellow Actual tube current is more than 30% less than
nominal
TEMP.ERR. red Temperature of HV transformer is more than 50°C
XC green X-ray enabled (X-ray control signal)
DOOR red Door to the gantry room is open
24V red Can indicate a SCAN EXECUTE Error if the ignition
voltage (24 Vdc) for the Inverter is interrupted
during a scan with X-ray. During all other activities
and states: not interpretable. Normally ON during a
scan done without X-ray
SHORT INV red Short circuit in Main Inverter Bridge
+UT > 82KV red Positive tube voltage greater than 82 kV
-UT < UT 82KV red Negative tube voltage less than - 82 kV
SCANT red X-ray lasted longer than prescribed. Scan time >
110%
UDC ok green DC voltage available
STOP (on MCB) red STOP LED stays ON until the MCU_MCB closes
the STOP-Report loop.
CYCLE (on MCB) green Blinks while the HVC_MCB is running. ON
(continued on next page)
continuously when in HALT state.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

GEN HV Control Board Test Points


Test points HVC LEDs
+15V Supply voltage for HV circuit
-15 V Supply voltage for HV circuit
+5V Supply voltage for HV circuit
UTnom Nominal value of the tube voltage (1 V = 20 kV)
S_INV Start lnverter signal (0 V active)
UTact Actual value of the tube voltage (1V = 20 kV)
2*F INV Inverter trigger signal (2*ignition – frequency)
ITact Actual tube current (1 V = 50 mA)
0VD Digital ground
0VA Analog ground
IS + Oscillating current of the inverter (1V = 100 A) floating 1> T

IS - Oscillating current of the inverter (1V = 100 A) floating


Sample of IS waveform:
1) Ch 1: 200 V 20 us

Jumper
D640 none
D333 (MCB) X1. 2 – 3 to X2. 2 - 3

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

GEN HV Acquisition Board (D642)


Test points
0V_A Analog ground
+UT_act Positive tube voltage (1 V = 10 kV)
-UT_act Negative tube voltage (-1 V = -10 kV)

Jumpers
X8 / X9 to
X10 / X11 Tube current ( 20 mA - 450 mA )
An MAS meter can be installed here to monitor tube current during service.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

HVC Tests
How to access:
1) Click on Service… Test…
2) Select Gen
3) Select controller HVC, then select the desired test.
Available HVC tests
Test Description Radiation?
HVCO1 General high-voltage test No (service tools required)
HVCO2 Component test No All components of the high voltage chain are tested.
HVCO3 Sequential run-up Yes HV tested from 70 to 140 kV
In test 1, the generator is tested with HV Transformer E604.
In test 2, the generator is tested with HV Transformer, HV slip rings, damping resistors and all HV cables from the
generator to the gantry damping resistors.
Tools required:
• Oscilloscope
• 2 dummy plugs
• Silicon sleeves, for dummy connectors
• 2 HV measurement connectors,
• Silicon ring, silicon washers, silicon oil for HV measurement connectors
• 2 adapters for high voltage measurement connectors
(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

HVCO1 Test: General High-Voltage Test


The high-voltage connection from generator to gantry damping resistors is checked in two steps. The tests are done
without filament heating nor anode rotation. The kV values are selectable; the default is 145kV. At the end of each
test, the detected kV and mA values are reported.
TEST 1: Test the Generator using the HV Tank E604.
Note Do not switch on high voltage without first inserting the dummy plugs into the HV-tank E604:
1) Switch off the system at the console with the ( EVA ON ) button.
2) Remove the high-voltage connectors at HV Tank E604.
3) Touch the HV connectors to the housing of the H1 Tank to discharge them.
4) Insert the dummy plugs with silicon sleeves into the HV Transformer.
5) Connect CH1 of oscilloscope to UTact on HV Control D640. UTact DC 2V/div (1 V = 2O KV)
GND: D640.OVA
Trigger: D640. S_inv neg
Time: 1s/div
6) Switch on the system at the console with the ( SYSTEM ON ) button.
7) Select the HVC01 test.
8) Set the kV values; you may use between 80kV and 140kV.
9) Start the test, click: GO. Scan time is approximately 45 seconds.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Computer Interface Board (CIB)


The CIB interfaces the Sparc computer with the scanner hardware. It interfaces the computer’s serial I/O to the
scanner’s. It distributes control between the Sun and the Siemens. It monitors the IMS cabinet temperature and can
open the temperature loop to the PDS. It connects the console audio components with the gantry ones. It adds a
module that enables recorded patient messages (API). It monitors IMS power levels.
LEDs
Label LED Color Definition Normal State
SMI Green 5 V SMI backplane supply ON
API Green 8 V for API (autovoice) ON
VCC Green 5V supply for Host (IMS)
VCC_LWL Green 5 V supply from CIB for EOS
+12 Green +12 V supply from Host (Sparc)
+12_LWL- Green +12 V supply from CIB for EOS
-12 Green -12 V supply from CIB (Sparc)
-12_LWL- Green -12 V supply from CIB for EOS (D206)
Switches
S1 Power for SMI ON/off
S2 Reset Over-Temperature condition

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

IMS Power Supply


F5 in PDS protects PS E105 UA3

K3 in PDS opens if IMS is too hot UA1 pot

Power Levels
UA1 5.025 ± 0.015 V
UA3 12.06 ± 0.06 V
UA2 5.025 ± 0.010 V

UA2 terminals

UA2 potentiometer

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

SMI
There are LEDs on each SMI board. Some of these LEDs have the same meaning on all boards; others have a
board-specific meaning. Below are the common LEDs. Their meaning is related to the tasks on the boards.
F-S on if a passive system bus cycle is running
off if no system bus cycle is running
INT on if the GIPSY is processing an interrupt
off if the GIPSY is in program mode
POR on if the GIPSY is not parameterized
off if the GIPSY has been parameterized
MMX on if a MMX bus is active
off if no MMX bus is active
The SMI boards have a similar design. They have identical interfaces for hardware and software. These are the
GIPSY and MAGIC interfaces. Each board also has an unique section to perform its particular processes that flow
via the MMX buses.
The system bus SYSBUS-II is connected via a standardized interface module called GIPSY (General Interface
Processor for SYsbus). It coordinates the execution of tasks on each board.
The MAGIC module (MMX Address Generator and Interface Controller) generates the addresses for the MMX
data transfer between the memories of the components. It is set up by the GIPSY. The MMX bus system consists of
four buses, MA, MB, MC, MD. MA runs through connector X3. MB, MC and MD run through connector X2. It
enables fast data transfer.
The upper connector X1 is not used in the present SMI-5 configuration. Additional MMX buses could be added in
the future.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

SIAM
The SIAM-C board is the reconstruction master. It interfaces the Sparc host with the SMI.

Common LEDs:
F-S on a system bus cycle is running
INT on the SYSBUS-GIPSY is processing an interrupt
POR on the SYSBUS-GIPSY has not been booted
MMX on an MMX bus is active
Specific LEDs:
MAS on mailbox access from the SPARC
MAG on mailbox access from the GIPSY
MAM on mailbox access from the MMX
ST on status access from the SPARC
IGS on interrupt from GIPSY to SPARC
ISG on interrupt from SPARC to GIPSY

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Table
D701 PTH BOARD TESTPOINTS
X41 SuppRefSw Indicates when the support cradle reference switch U710 is made
X42 TableRefSw Indicates when the Table Top reference switch U711 is made
X40 HTP Pulses Horiz feed pulse encoder, used to trigger DAS during topos.
X43 TableDir Feed direction. H = feed in. L= feed out. Comes from B71 encoder
X44 TableCount Table Top feed encoder (B711) output
X33 VCC +5 Vdc from G700 power supply
X35 Gnd Ground ref for G700 PS

G700 POWER SUPPLY INPUTS, OUTPUTS, BREAKERS (breakers located on left side bottom)
X1 230 Vac Input . Fused at the PDS F16 breaker.
U1_1 5 Vdc to D701 board. Fused at the F701/3A breaker.
U1_2 5 Vdc to D702 board. Fused at the F702/3A breaker.
U2_P 12 Vdc to D702 board. Fused at the F703/3A breaker.
U3_P 12 Vdc to D702 for the freq. converter. NOT FUSED.
U4_P 24 Vdc to D701 for table top feed motor. Fused at the F704/3A breaker.
U4_P 24 Vdc to D701 for support cradle feed motor. Fused at the F705/3A breaker.

List of Table Switches and Encoders

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

Table Switches and Encoders


S701 Manual service override table up switch (located right side bottom)
S702 Manual service override table down switch (located right side bottom)
S703 Manual service override master service switch (located right side bottom)
S704 Vertical spindle safety interlock switch (opens if spindle dislodges)
S706a-d Manual override feed footswitch (located between table and gantry on floor)
S711a-b Horizontal blocking safety interlock switches (located on back of support cradle)
S712-715 Vertical blocking safety interlock switches (located under edge of table top)
U702 Vertical release switch (min height for feed forward interlock switch)
U710 Support cradle parked position reference switch
U711 Table top parked position reference switch
R710 Support cradle backup feed position potentiometer 5K/1.5W
R711 Table top backup feed position potentiometer 5K/1.5W
B710 Support cradle feed position encoder
B711 Table top feed position encoder
B702 Vertical height encoder

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

How to Scan in Customer Mode


1) Select the Patient softkey from the top menu on monitor.
2) From this menu select Register.
3) When Patient Register platform comes up, type in a Patient Name.
4) Enter a Patient Number; any number will do.
5) Select Scan Reg button from this platform.
6) Answer Yes to the next platform.
7) From the Topogram Select platform (scout), you can select which type of study you wish to perform i.e. head,
body etc. The normal table position for head is 125 mm below isocenter, for body 160 mm)
8) Select Go
9) Press the Start button when prompted.
10) The next screen after this scan is completed is the tomogram screen (axial).
11) Click on the displayed image. A box will appear. You can click and drag on this block to adjust the size and
position... This will determine your scan range.
12) Select the desired scan parameters from the tomo platform.
13) Click Go
14) The system will ask you to press and hold the Move button to position table. Ensure that you hold the button
until the table stops.
15) Press Start when prompted.
A study is normally ended when a new patient is registered.
Normal protocol is automatic archiving upon ending of study.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

How to Film
Note Normal medical scanning protocol is to select Auto Filming during scan setup. This is here to help you
use Filming as a tool and record.
1) Select Filming… from the top menu bar displayed at the top of screen.
2) Select Interactive from the drop-down menu.
3) Select Segment option in the filming interactive window. This will fill one segment at a time from whatever
study you have displayed. Use Ima + and Ima - buttons on the keyboard to display the next or previous
image.

How to Check Status and Change Settings


To see what jobs are queued, active, suspended, etc., select Job Control from the filming interactive window. You
can also select Settings from the same window to change filming parameters such as film size, segments, etc.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Functional Checks

UPS
The UPS will display a flashing LED and sound an audible alarm in case of a power problem. The most common
problem is battery failure or battery breaker trip.
In case of problems:
1) Check the battery breaker and reset if necessary (back of bottom case).
2) Place unit in bypass and recheck in 24 hours.
3) Replace battery unit.
Unit may also be put in bypass to check site power to conditioned power.

About the Powerware 3000 UPS


Many PLUS 4 systems in the US have been upgraded to have a UPS attached to the IMS in case of brown/black out
of system power. The Powerware is a 3000VA/2100W UPS designed to provide uninterrupted power to the
computer and reconstruction electronics for approximately 35 minutes in case of a power problem. This time will
allow the customer to complete reconstruction functions in progress and shutdown the system in an orderly manner
if power to the system is not restored.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Logic/Block Diagrams

System Block Diagram Data Acquisition


System Control Reconstruction
Temperature Control HV Generation
Power for Console and Host Anode and Filament Control
PSS - Gantry Power to Pedestal Components Beam Focus Phi (Deflection)
Power to Rotating Gantry Components Beam Focus Z (Thickness & Centering)
Additional Rotating Gantry Power Sources Audio
Laser Lights Power for Table
Rotate Vertical Movement
Tilt Horizontal Movements

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

System Block Diagram

Monitor(s)
Water Cooling
System (WCS) Temperature Control
Humidity Control
(Cooling)
UDC
Console HV Generation
HV
Cabinet
Control Patient Communication HV SLR
IMS Cabinet SLR (Audio ) E430
E400
X-ray
System Tube
Sparc Host
Control Anode
HDLC
Diaphragm Control
IMS APU (collimator) (RAC)
Data Archival
Trafo Lasers DPU
Unit (LIMA)
Reconstruction
Acquisition Beam Shaping X-ray
(SMI) Rotate
Control Control
(C Box) (XC Box)
Power Tilt
Distribution Detector Diaphragm
System (PDS) Detector
TableTop Horizontal Drive Data Acquisition
(DAS) Integrator Bds Power
Top Support Horizontal Table & SLR
Measure-
Drive Gantry E420
ment
Table Power & 230VAC
(DAS)
Vertical Drive Control
Data SLR
E410
230 VAC

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

System Control WCS

HVC 5 PTV 4
GEN TABLE
DCC 6 PTH 3

Sparc
Console Start Scan MCU 0 RTC 2
Host

GPC 1
Control Data Stationary D400
RAC 7
Control Data SLR E400
Control Data Rotating D401
CAN
CAN
The Controller Area Network DOSE
(CAN) with its Stop/Report C Box Dose OK FIL 8
circuit enters the XC box PreXrayOff
through XC Side 2 D576.
ACU_1 ACU_2
There it enters the XC
C EvenRea X
Backplane to Z_CON, DLP 9
Tube Arc R
DELPHI, FIL_CON. It travels
out to the RAC Box to A
CAN XC Box Y
RAC_CON through XC Side 1
D571. The loop returns in the
ZCO A O
reverse order.
N

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

System Cooling
OK if water T is 18 OK if water T is less than 35 (95)
to 28 C (63 to 86 F) warmer than 20 (68)

Sensor M304 & WCS IMS


E103 E607
B302 M305 M1 M2
CIB
E321 Temperature internal fuses
Sparc Host
dehumidifier Sensor B304
PDS HV Tank
Cooler Pwr
F2 WCS pwr oil
Sensor Control
GPC MCU F6
pump
B303 IMS heat
F9 Dehumidifier
F13 WCS controller
GEN
GANTRY F14 WCS pumps

if Site Water is detected DCC


GPC monitors Gantry air as being too warm (from CIB senses IMS monitors
temperature and humidity sensor 2R4), solenoid temperature; if too E602, error if
valve 2Y2 opens and hot, PDS CB F15 T > 70 C
MCU monitors WCS statuses: 2Y1 closes to stop water K3 opens and (160 F)
IMS/GEN water too hot from 2R5 circulation. shuts off system!
Gantry water too hot from 2R2 HVC LED
Gantry Air T from B304 indicates
GEN temp >
50 C (120 F)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Power for Console and Host

Concon S1 disables power to console


Console S1 and monitors
Concon
Keyboard D801 SYS_ON IMS
EVA_ON
12V E801
OFF
Filtr Z801
24V
Temp>60 Power removed
E801 supplies 2
keyboard, mouse 3 OFF
Split Bd Temp>50 Warning
and D801 0
V EVA SYS D204
A
C K1 K2 SMI
PDS 24V
CIB Host
EVA_ON
Temperature
powers only the F15 K3 D203 Sparc 10
SMI, Host,
Console, any PDS supplies 24V loops that
Archive devices
control console power
and the WCS. 5V
switches, Filter
F5 IMS Power Supply E105 12V
temperature E111
monitoring in IMS,
gantry and Heat Exchanger E103
generator, AND F6
generator NS Relay Filter I/O Panel E104
About UPS for DC Bridge E112
Fan E118

PDS connections (w/ UPS) Gantry Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

PSS
L1 L1 D321 L1 Rotate 400 S301 Rotate
Frequency
L2 Fuse F301 L2 D322 L2 400 safety Motor
Converter
L3 L3 D323 L3 400 switch M301
E301
Stop
Relays Tilt
PDS Tilt
Line Filter Frequency
L1 L1 L1 Fuse F302 L1 D324 L1 L1 Motor
Z304 Converter
fuse 8 M302
L2 L2 E302
mostly with
L3 fuse 9 for L3 L1 Fuse F303 L1 5V 5V
dehumidifier Fuse F311 24V
12V 12V
Fuse F312 MCU_RTC 12V LPS
D301 D302
PS E303 24V 24V
Stationary Fuse F314 12V
Line Gantry Tilt
Filter 12V 12V Sensor
Z301 Fuse F313 B301
GPC D311
24V 24V provides Patient Handling & supplies
Fuse F315 Audio, Control
Data D400
L2 Fuse F304 L2 and DMS
Fan M304 Data Receiver
D410 with 24V
L2 Fuse F305 L2 Fan M305

Power Slip Rings


Rotating
Line Filter 230 V 230 VAC Gantry
L3 Fuse F306 L3 E420 Components
Z303
Filament Filament
Table Power DC DC

L1 Fuse F307 L1 Dehumidifier

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Power to Rotating Gantry Components Trafo Unit 9, 9.5, 19, 19.5 Vac
F4 -7, 10 10.5, 19.5 Vac
XC_BOX E570 F11 24 V
I POWER DISTRIBUTION D575 230 VAC
230 VAC 0 X2 X3 S1 F1 230 VAC Tube
F1 F3 F2 X4
X1 X7 X6 F2 Pump
Power X5
SLR 230 VAC
230 VAC from Trafo if D40, direct from SLR if D504
325 VDC
E420
FIL_CON D572 I
See more detail DPU E530 0 Detector HV D40 or
Heater D504
+5, +15,
FIL_MCB
-15, 24V +5, 24V ACU_2

-5V ACU_MCB
+ 24 V +5,
DELPHI D573 D415 DMS
+ 24 V +15,
Driver
-15V
DLP_MCB

RAC_Box E560 C_Box E510

Z-CON D574 +5,


RAC Fan +15,
ZCO_MCB
-15V Detector
250V

XC Fan DAS E500


APU E540 24 V
+5, +/-15V DAS fans
Gantry Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Additional Rotating Gantry Power Sources

XC_BOX Backplane Tube Side Diaphragms


D570 M1
XC Side 1 X3 +24V M2
D571
5V E1
X4 +5, +15V, -15V 5V E2
PHI_AMP
+5, D555
+15, FOC_MON
DPU E530 -15,
24V

LIMA E581 LIMA E582 LIMA E583 LIMA E580


X5 +5V

XC Side 2 X3 +15V, -15V ZMON_2


D576 D585

X5
S1 & S2 M1 Detector Diaphragm
X4
E1

Gantry Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Laser Lights

Gantry Stationary Gantry Rotating


External
Laser
E353 LIMA E581 LIMA E582 LIMA E583 LIMA E580
Gantry Power
5V
5V
XC_BOX Backplane D570
MCU/ Left GPC XC Side 1 DELPHI D573 XC Side 2
RTC Keypad D311
E351 Monitors/ controls:
D301 12V DLP_MCB

GPC_MCB
MCU_
MCB Table Position
Gantry Tilt
Right Gantry Door Switches ON/off
Keypad Temperature
E352 12V Humidity C_Box E510
Laser

24V
Control ACU_2
CTL-DATA D400 E400 D401 Signals ACU_MCB
CAN stationary SLR rotating
CAN

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Rotate
Gantry 3 phase Electro Magnetic
AP 1440 Slots Ring Motor
Console
Ring
1 Index pulse 1/rev
Brake
MCU/RTC 1440 AP0 Angular Pulses M301 E222
D301 LPS
IMS Angular Pulses Damping
1440 AP90 Phase Shifted Pulses
D302
Instructions Resistors
Host MCU_MCB
CIB not
Sparc D203 Mechanical
RTC_MCB

Stop
Switches
S302/3/ Rotate
Frequency Safety
S304/5 Switch
Converter
S301
Relays E301
GPC D321-3
Left
D311 OP Normally
Panel holds Set S301 to 0
Monitors E351
: CB position prior to working
with a in open gantry
Table Position 12V F301 constant
Gantry Tilt voltage
Gantry Door Switches Right
Temperature OP
Panel Filter
Humidity
Gantry Power E352 Z301
Laser
L1,L2, L3 from PSS

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Tilt
Gantry Power Spindle Tilt Motor
Console Brake
MCU-RTC E222

D301 M302
Motor Temperature
Instructions
MCU_MCB
Host CIB
Sparc D203
RTC_MCB Stop
Tilt Tilt
Switches
Sensor S302, S303 Frequency
IMS
B301 S304, S305 Converter

E302
Relay

Left D324
GPC OP
Panel
D311 E351
CB
Monitors:
12V F302
Table Position
Right
Gantry Tilt
OP
Gantry Door Switches Panel Filter
Temperature E352 Z304
Humidity
Gantry Power Laser L1 from PSS

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Data Acquisition Control Data


Slip Rings Detector

D400 D501
D401 CTL-DATA E500
Control Integrator Boards
E400 Control ACU-2
Data l Board CAN
Board

Gantry
CTL-DATA ADC-1 ADC-2 ADC-3
Stationary CAN
RAC
Gantry Power Tube arc ACU_ D511 D511 D511
Dose ok MCB
DMS
needs XRC Enable X-ray
too know ACU-1
current D513 DOSIS_
table D512
MON
(HTP)
Measurement
and DAS D550
gantry Gantry Slip
D t Rings
azimuth Rotating
AP0 & AP90 D416 E410 D415 DPU
prevent
positions reflections SLR- SLR- supplies
TERM DRV -5V

SMI D30 D410 GPC


D96 measurement data supplies
Data I/OReceiver fiber optic cable SLR-REC
Gantry
Stationary 24V

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Reconstruction
IMS (Imaging Cabinet)

SMI
Siemens
Data I/O
Medical Memory And
Gantry D30
fiber optic Imager Receiver Backplane Processor Boards
SLR_REC
D410 D96 MAP-40 D55
DAS data Buffering
Processing

Backplane

Array Processor AP-D


SBD
Imagers Back
D57
D70 Projector(s)
D83 Backplane
convolution
VIDEO

EOS EOS

Monitor Monitor Image Disk

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

HV Generation

WCS
water

MCU GENERATOR
air oil
POWER SUPPLY E606 Heat
+5.1V +15V -15V +24V Exchanger
PDS L3 F7 Fan E605 E607 Pump
F10
Site Inverter
K5 HV
Pwr Line Input E601 DC Circuit E602 E603
Tank
opens DCC_CON HV_CON HV_Acq E604 KV_P
when L1 F1 F4 D650 D640 D642
L1
GEN T L2 F2 F5 SHIELD
Filter
DCC_MCB HVC_
>50C L3 F3 F6
MCB KV_N
NS Cap
Bridge P_UDC HV
Bank
S1
D651 N_UDC Trigger
Relay Bd D670 K5 D652
D641
F12 24 V Loop K2 K3
24 V Loop

K1 Door Sw F8 P_UDC
Anode Starter
K4 XrayLamp F9 N_UDC

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Anode and Filament Control


XC_BOX E570
230 VAC
POWER DISTRIBUTION
Power
D575 +325V
SLR RAC_Box E562 CAN
P_UDC
E420 Anode Starter
RAC_MCB
N_UDC
DELPHI D573
temperature S1
STATOR temperature S2 DLP_MCB
KV_P Damp ANODE pressure S3
HV R Pos
SLR deflection
E430 Tube Housing
KV_SHIELD
XRAYON FIL_DOSE
KV_N
Filament Size FIL_CON D572
Damp R Neg

CAN C_Box E510 CAN


FIL_MCB
Control Stop Stop
DOSE_OK
SLR ACU_2
Control PREXRAYOFF
E400
Signals
ACU_MCB EVENREA to DLP
TubeArc from DLP

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Beam Focus Phi (Deflection) XC_BOX E570


230 VAC POWER DISTRIBUTION D575

Power
SLR
E420
X-RAY TUBE E550
DELPHI D573
STATOR
ANODE DLP_MCB

Gantry Power Tube Housing


deflection

Collimator E555
FOC_MON Current focus
PHI_AMP GAIN or TEST

XRAYON FIL_DOSE

FIL_CON D572

Control CAN C_Box E510 CAN


SLR Stop Stop FIL_MCB
E400 DOSE_OK
Control ACU_2 PREXRAYOFF
Signals ACU_MCB EVENREA to DLP

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Beam Focus Z XC_BOX E570

230 VAC POWER DISTRIBUTION D575

Power
SLR
X-RAY TUBE E550
E420
Collimator E555
Z_CON D574
adjust collimator diaphragm 1
M1
stepping motors adjust collimator diaphragm 2 ZCO_MCB
pulse generators G2 M2
G1
GAIN or TEST
also from/to
PHI_AMP D555 E1 E2
DOSE DELPHI
FOC_MON E556

Z_MON_2 GAIN or TEST


Z2_1 Actual beam position
PSD
Z2_2
XRAYON FIL_DOSE
Detector
DELPHI D573
CAN CAN
Control C_Box E510
Stop Stop DLP_MCB
SLR
E400 Control ACU_2
Signals ACU_MCB EVENREA to DLP

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Audio

Console Gantry
Mic MIC 1 B311
Speaker API Lamp patient
Console Power
H301
Gantry
MIC 2 B312
Call Hear Audio
system
Bd D341

GPC SPKR B313


24V D311
Split Bd IMS 12V 24V
D204
Computer
Interface Comm MCU
Comm
D301
Sparc Host
API D77
Audio

Gantry Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Power for Table


Motor
Table
M702
Gantry
PDS PSS
Stop Line Vertical
K4 F15 L2 L2 Relay Filter Frequency
D703 Z702 Converter
L2 F8 230V
F16 L2 L2
STOP E702

S1
PT_Ver D702
can supply table 5V F702 Vcc
w/o power to Table
gantry Power 12V F703 24V
Supply U3 12V
G700
PT_Hor D701
5V F701 Vcc
24V F705 Cradle Drive
F704 Support
Drives

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Vertical Movement Table


Gantry
Service
Encoder Switches
Console MCU/RTC B702 S701-03
PT_Ver
D301
Temper
Release D702 ature
IMS Switch
U702 M702
K4 Spindle Motor
Host CIB Instructions Brake
CAN K5
D203 MCU_MCB Y702
Sparc

PTV_MCB Vertical
PT_Hor
D701 Frequency
HTP K2 Down Converter
PTH_
MCB K3 Up E702
STOP
GPC K1 Active
D311 Footsw
Left Monitors/ Blocked
OP Line
controls:
Gantry Power Panel Filter
E351 Z702
Table Position Footswitch
12V Gantry Tilt E703
Gantry Door Switches
Right Temperature Obstacle STOP
OP Switch Relay
Table Power Humidity
Panel S704 D703
E352 Laser

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Logic/Block Diagrams

Horizontal Movements
Gantry Table
Brake
Encoder Y711
Console MCU/RTC B711
PT_Hor Motor M711
D301 Brake
Cradle D701 Y712
IMS Position Pot Clutch
R711 Y713
Host CIB PTH_MCB
Instructions Proximity
CAN
Sparc D203 MCU_MCB Switch
U711 (X42)
HTP
Vertical
(X40)
PT_Ver Blocked
D702 S712-715
STOP K1
Active Table Top
Footsw Top Support
PTV_
MCB Blocked
GPC
Motor M710
D311 Left Brake
Gantry Power OP Encoder
Monitors: Y710
Panel B710
E351 Proximity
Table Position Switch
Gantry Tilt 12V U710 (X41)
Support
Gantry Door Switches Position Pot
Table Power Right Safety
Temperature R710
OP Switches
Humidity
Panel S711a & b
Laser E352

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Preventive Maintenance

System Panel Install and Remove Links Gantry Bearings


Safety Guidelines Dehumidifier
Tools Required Lubricate Table Parts
PM Parts Check Table Mechanics
Inspect System Status Cabinet Maintenance
Test Xray Safety Unit Care
Test Table Safety Clean the Surfaces
Test EMERGENCY STOP How to Install Unit Covers
How to Open Gantry Test the Protective Conductor
How to Open Slip Ring System Check System Quality
Power Slip Ring Assembly
Control Data Slip Ring Assembly Caution This is a reference guide to the
Measurement Data Slip Ring Assembly PM needed by this scanner. It is
not complete. Refer to OEM
High Voltage Slip Ring Assembly manuals or GE sanctioned PM
How to Close the Slip Ring System process.

Detector
Check Detector Pressure Open a WORD doc for PM Checklist

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

System Panel Installation and Removal


How to Open the Gantry
How to Open the Slip Ring System
How to Close the Slip Ring System
How to Install the Unit Covers
How to Test the Protective Conductor

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Safety Guidelines
Before you work in the gantry:
• Disable gantry rotation by setting the Service Switch S301 to the '0' position.

• Connect the stationary and rotating parts of the gantry with a protective conductor cable
(4665329 B1945).
After concluding work on the gantry:
• Remove the protective conductor cable before you re-enable gantry rotation.
• Test the protective conductor connections to all metal covers that were removed for the maintenance
work.
• Set service switch S301 to position " 1 ".

More Safety Information

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Tools Required
You need the following tools or supplies to perform preventive maintenance:
• 10 mm attachment for ratchet
• 8 mm hex socket (extra long)
• Caliper
• Isoflex Topas NCA 52 Item No.1590863
• Lubricant for patient table, gantry bearings and diaphragm bearing
• Screwdriver
• Circlip pliers
• Spring gauge
• Tape measure
• Tweezers
• Soft cloth to clean monitor screen
• Cleaning agent for system components
• Plexiglas cleaner, soap suds, or commercially available cleanser (for accessories made of Plexiglas and
CFK)
• Protective conductor testing device: item number 4415899 RV090

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

PM Parts
Parts Lists
You need the following parts to perform preventive maintenance:
Slip Ring Brushes:
1610257 (14 carbon Control data)
2216489 (3 carbon High tension)
4135448 (7 silver Control data)
7207889 (8 carbon Power)
Air filter for dehumidifier
2793250 (1 Type KKW)
2793268 (1 Type KEU-CITEX)
Silicon sleeves for Generator HV-Tank, dumping resistor 1621270
Silicon sleeves HV-Connector gantry stationary 1621502
Silicon paste P4 2049914
Air Filter for Power IMS and GEN cabinets (2 per cabinet) 7042088 (4)
Air Filter for an Expert IMS 7050115

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Test Xray Safety


Note Many of the safety tests are performed in the Service … Test… program. They can be done from
the menubar if the site has OEM proprietary software.

Check Radiation Shutdown ( 108% )


This test checks whether the scan time monitor in the generator is working. The test loads a scan mode with a
higher number of readings than required for the respective scan time. After a radiation period of 110% (nominal
scan time plus 10%), the generator should switch off and send an error message.
The test is performed in base mode using the following scan parameters: 110 kV, 70 mA, 3 sec, 5 mm
1) Select XRS Timer and GO in the SERVICE … TEST… program. If the test is successful, the error message
XRS TIMED OUT appears.
2) Select RESET in the softkey menu.
3) Select DONE in the TEST softkey menu to end the test.
Check the radiation " ON " Lamp
This test checks the radiation ON lamp.
1) Click MASTER and then GO in the SERVICE… TEST… platform. The test is successful if the radiation ON
lamp glows and no error messages appear.
2) Enter DONE to end the test.
Check the door contact switch if installed at the site
1) Select the MASTER and EXTERNAL DOOR functions from the SERVICE …TEST… GANTRY softkey menu.
2) Start the test with GO. The test is successful if "scan room door is open" appears on the right side of the
screen when the door is open.
3) Select DONE to end the test.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance
Check the Table Safety Limit Switches
The patient table is equipped with eight safety limit switches located at the head and foot of the table. They should
stop table movement when an obstacle is met.
1) Remove the side covers on the right and left sides of the table with a 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
2) Press one of the safety limit switches while the table is moving. Table travel should stop immediately. An
error message should appear on the monitor.
3) Perform the same test for all safety limit switches in the table.
Note If the switch does not stop movement, replace it. ( Refer to the Table manual, Register 5:
Replacement of Parts )

Check the PTV Spindle Brake


1) Select: TEST SPINDLE BRAKE, then GO in the SERVICE … TEST… program:
The brake is released during execution of the test. If the table drops when the brake is released,
an error message will appear. If this happens, replace the brake. If no error occurs, the
end of the test will be confirmed by a message.
2) Select DONE to end the test.
Check the PTV Motor Brake
1) Select: TEST MOTOR BRAKE, then GO in the SERVICE … TEST… program. The brake is released during
execution of the test. If the table drops when the brake is released, an error message will appear. If this
happens, replace the brake. If no error occurs, the end of the test will be confirmed by a message.
2) Select DONE to end the test.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Check EMERGENCY STOP


Note This control enables the immediate shutdown of all motor-driven components.
1) Enable Service functions by clicking: System… Change Mode.
2) Load the rotate mode with: Scan Mode… ROT
3) While the gantry is rotating, press the red EMERGENCY STOP button on the keyboard. This should stop all
motor-driven components. The system message "Measurement aborted" should appear on the right side of
the screen.
4) Press the RESET button that appears on the right side of the screen. The system will load the selected mode
again.
5) Repeat the above test for the EMERGENCY STOP button on both sides of the gantry front.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Inspect System Status


1) Check all system components for damage.
2) Check the measurement phantoms for damage.
3) Inspect the water phantom for algae and air bubbles. Fill it if necessary. Use distilled or de-ionized water.
4) Review Error Statistics: Select LOGBOOK from the SYSTEM menubar choice.
5) Check System Temperatures using the Cooling Cabinet LCD.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

How to Open Gantry


How to open the front cover
1) Open the front door of the gantry
2) Lower the patient table to the minimum position.
3) Turn the locking screws to release the door.
4) Lift the door upward.
How to remove the pedestal covers
1) Rotate top screws clockwise to loosen. The bottom screws loosen and tighten in the normal way.
How to remove the rear cover
1) Switch off the system via the line power supply switch.
2) Turn the locking screws to release the back cover of the gantry.
3) Lift the back cover out of the support brackets and remove it from the gantry.
How to remove the rear gantry funnel
1) Remove all 6 hex nuts (8 mm ) at the funnel. These screws can be accessed from the front of the gantry.
2) Disconnect the cables of the funnel ( back of gantry: X312 and X325 ).
3) Carefully remove the funnel from the back of the gantry.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

How to Open Slip Ring System


CAUTION The slip rings contain high levels of voltage which they retain when the system is switched off.
Discharge the voltage using a grounding clamp and a cable.
1) Turn the detector to the 6 o'clock position.
2) Disconnect connector D302 X.1 at D302, LPS Board.
3) Disconnect fiber optic cable at D410, SLR REC.
4) Disconnect two connectors at D410 SLR REC.
5) Cut the tie wraps.
6) Remove the cable ties from the cable harness at the upper right at the back of the gantry.
7) Remove the six Allen screws ( 4 mm ) from the control data slip ring cover.
8) Remove the Allen screw ( 8 mm ) at the lower right in the back of the gantry.
9) Remove the Allen screw ( 8 mm ) at the upper left at the back of the gantry.
10) Carefully pull the slip ring assembly toward the back until it reaches the mechanical stop.
Note Watch the cable harness to prevent mechanical stress.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Power Slip Ring Assembly


Note The slip rings must be clean. Do not touch them with your fingers or other materials. If they
become oily, e.g. fingerprints, clean them with alcohol.
Note Important: Do not touch the contact surface of the carbon brushes.

Clean the power slip ring assembly


1) Clean the power slip ring tracks using a vacuum cleaner.
2) Remove dust from the carbon brushes using a paint brush and vacuum cleaner.
Check the power carbon brushes
1) Measure the length of the carbon brushes using a caliper. Measure from the contact surface of the brush to
the brush holder. The length of the brushes must not be less than 7.5 mm.
2) If the length is less than 7.5 mm, replace the carbon brushes.
How to replace the power carbon brushes
1) Remove two slotted screws.
2) Press the carbon brushes out of the brush holder.
3) Insert the new carbon brushes.
4) Tighten the slotted screws at the connection piece.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Control Data Slip Ring Assembly


Note Do not touch the slip rings or brush contact surface with your fingers. Practice ESD.

Clean the control data slip ring assembly


1) Clean the control data slip ring tracks with a vacuum cleaner.
2) Remove dust from the carbon brushes with a paint brush and vacuum cleaner.
Check the control data brushes
1) Measure the length of the carbon brushes using a caliper. Measure from the top of the brush to the housing.
2) If the carbon brushes are less than 5.0 mm long, replace them.
How to replace the control data carbon brushes
1) Ground your wrist and disconnect all cables from board D400, SLR INTS.
2) Remove the Allen screw (3 mm) at the upper left corner of the board.
3) Remove the two knurled screws from the board.
4) Remove the carbon brush assembly from the cover.
5) Remove the Allen screw (3 mm) at the center of the assembly. The board can now be tilted away from the
carbon brush holder.
6) Replace the carbon brushes. Two types are used. Compare them to ensure the correct brushes are installed.
7) Tighten the center Allen screws (3 mm).
8) Attach the assembly to the slip ring cover.
9) Tighten the knurled screws and upper left Allen screw.
10) Replace all cable connections.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Measurement Data Slip Ring Assembly


Note The slip rings must be clean. Do not touch them with your fingers or other materials. If they
become oily, e.g. fingerprints, clean them with alcohol.
Note Do not touch the contact surface of the carbon brushes with your fingers and ensure that they do
not become dirty.
Note Observe ESD guidelines for handling electrostatically sensitive components when removing
D410.

Clean the measurement data slip ring assembly ,


1) Remove the five Allen screws ( 4 mm ) from the cover. Remove the cables from the board.
2) Remove the five hexagonal screws from the board, D410 slip ring receiver.
3) Remove the board from the slip ring cover.
4) Clean the Measurement Data Slip Rings using a vacuum cleaner.
5) Use the opening to remove the dust on the slip ring tracks.
6) Turn the slip ring cover by hand while cleaning the slip ring tracks.
7) Remove dust from the carbon brushes by using a paint brush and a vacuum cleaner.

Check the measurement data carbon brushes


1) Measure the length of carbon brushes from the contact surface to the housing using a caliper.
2) If the brushes are less than 5.0 mm long, replace them. Procedure is on next page.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance
How to replace the measurement data carbon brushes.
1) Remove the two Allen screws from the plastic block at the board.
2) Press the carbon brushes out of the holder.
3) Replace only those carbon brushes that are less than 5 mm long.
4) Insert the new carbon brushes.
5) Replace the plastic block with two Allen screws.
6) Replace the carbon brush assembly to the slip ring cover.
7) Secure the carbon brush assembly with the five hex screws.
8) Reconnect the cables.
9) Install the cover with five Allen screws.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

High Voltage Slip Ring Assembly


Clean the high voltage slip ring assembly
Note Do not touch the slip rings nor the brushes with your fingers or other materials.
1) Use a clean cloth soaked in alcohol to clean the tracks in the inner slip ring cover
2) Remove dust from the carbon brushes by using a paint brush or a vacuum cleaner.
3) Clean the dust from the slip ring tracks with a vacuum cleaner.
Check the high voltage carbon brushes
1) Measure the length of carbon brushes from the contact surface to the housing using a caliper.
2) If the brushes are less than 6.0 mm long, replace them. Procedure is on next page.
How to replace the high-voltage carbon brushes
1) Label the high-voltage connectors with the corresponding polarity before you remove them.
2) Remove the Allen screws for the connectors.
3) Remove the cables connected to the connectors.
4) Remove the connectors from the slip ring assembly.
5) Remove the silicon sleeve from the connector.
6) Remove the attachment nut of the carbon brush using special (circlip) pliers.
7) Turn the carbon brush to remove it from the holder.
8) Insert the new carbon brush in the holder.
9) Turn the carbon brush in the holder using tweezers.
10) Place the attachment nut on the holder and tighten it.
11) Clean the conical end of the connector. (continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance
12) Spread a thin layer of silicon paste on the conical end of the connector.
13) Place the new silicon sleeve on the cone. Protect the sleeve against becoming dirty during the installation.
14) Spread a thin layer of silicon paste on the silicon sleeve as well.
15) Clean the cone in the gantry with a clean cloth soaked in alcohol.
16) Spread a thin layer of silicon paste on the cone in the gantry.
17) Insert the high-voltage connector in the gantry, turning slightly.
18) Connect the cables.
19) Secure the connector to the back of the slip ring assembly with Allen screws. Use 10 Nm torque.
20) Install new dust collecting foam for the high-voltage brushes.

How to replace the ground carbon brush


The carbon brushes holder cannot be removed from the slip ring assembly.
1) Remove the attachment nut of the carbon brush using special ( circlip ) pliers).
2) Turn the carbon brush to remove it from the holder.
3) Insert the new carbon brush in the holder.
4) Important: Do not touch the front of the carbon brush with your fingers.
5) Turn the carbon brush in the holder using tweezers.
6) Place the attachment nut on the holder and tighten it.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

How to replace the silicon sleeves


Note Silicon sleeves need to remain clean and oiled. They also require proper placement.
1) Label the high-voltage connectors with the corresponding polarity before you remove them.
2) Remove the Allen screws for the connectors.
3) Remove the cables.
4) Remove the connectors from the slip ring assembly.
5) Remove the silicon sleeve from the connector.
6) Clean the conical end of the connector.
7) Spread a thin layer of silicon paste on the conical end of the connector.
8) Place the new silicon sleeve on the cone.
9) Clean the cone in the gantry with a clean cloth soaked in alcohol.
10) Spread a thin layer of silicon paste on the cone in the gantry.
11) Insert the high-voltage connector in the gantry, turning slightly.
12) Connect the cables.
13) Secure the connector to the back of the slip ring assembly with Allen screws. Use 10 Nm of torque.
14) Install new dust collecting foam for the high-voltage brushes.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

How to Close the Slip Ring System


1) Push the slip ring assembly toward the front of the gantry.
2) Ensure the cable harness is not under mechanical stress.
3) Tighten the Allen screws (8 mm) at the upper left and lower right sides of the gantry.
4) Align the funnel holder ring and insert the six Allen screws.
5) Connect the measurement data assembly cable.
6) Secure the cables with ties.
7) Ensure no cables are touching the rotating part of the gantry.
8) Secure the cables at the upper right of the gantry in the back using two cable ties.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Detector
Clean the detector window
Ensure the radiation window of the detector is free from all contaminants such as contrast medium.
Clean the detector window with alcohol, if necessary.
Clean/check the detector diaphragm
Check the contrast surfaces of the ball bearing on the detector collimator.
Clean any contaminants from the contact surfaces.
Re-lubricate the contact surfaces of the ball bearing after they have been cleaned.
Check the tension of the drive chain for the detector diaphragm. It should be approximately 40 N.
Check Detector Pressure
1) Check detector pressure at the detector manometer.
2) Fill the detector to 24.5 - 25.0 bar if the pressure has dropped below 20 bar.
3) Refer to the OEM System manual, Reg. 8, Chapter 7 for illustrated procedure.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Gantry Bearings
Main Bearing
Lubricate the main bearing with the lubricant: Isoflex Topas NCA 52 ( 1590863 ) grease gun.
1) Remove the left side cover.
2) Look down about one foot through the cable opening near the tilt sensor to find.
3) Connect the grease gun to the lubricating nipple.
4) Set switch S1 on the RTC to Service.
5) Use switch S5 on the RTC to select Rotation Mode.
6) Rotate the gantry slowly using switches S2 and S3.
7) Apply about 15 g (0.5 oz.) of lubricant into the bearing.
Small Bearing
1) Lubricate the small bearing with the lubricant: Isoflex Topas MCA42 (1590) grease gun.
2) Remove the gantry funnel.
3) Connect the grease gun to the lubricating nipple. Take care not to damage the slotted ring.
4) Introduce approximately 6 g of lubricant into the bearing.
5) Use Service Mode like above to rotate the gantry while lubricating the small bearing.
6) Stop the rotation of the gantry.
7) Clean any lubricant residues from the system.
8) Return the system to normal status.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Dehumidifier
The air filters must be replaced at regular intervals. Keep reserve filters available. The system should not be
operated without air filters.
Note There are two types of dehumidifiers; each has a different procedure for replacement.
Replacing filter Type KKW
1) Remove the upper cover of the right gantry pedestal.
2) Pull the filter assembly out of the dehumidifier and replace the filter.
3) Put the filter assembly back in the dehumidifier.
4) Install the cover.
Replacing filter Type Ceu-Citex
1) Remove the upper cover of the right gantry pedestal.
2) Loosen the four Allen screws of the dehumidifier.
3) Pull out the entire dehumidifier. Take care to avoid damaging the cables.
4) Remove one Allen screw from the filter assembly.
5) Replace the filter.
6) Put the filter assembly back and tighten it with the Allen screw.
7) Install the dehumidifier.
8) Secure the dehumidifier with four Allen screws.
9) Install the cover.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Lubricate Table Parts


How to open the table
1) Move the table to a medium height.
2) Pull the tabletop along with the top support to the end stop at the foot end.
3) Remove the switch rails at the foot end of the table.
4) Remove the four attachment screws ( Allen 2.5 mm ).
5) Disconnect the protective conductor from the switch rails.
6) Remove the two attachment screws ( 5 mm Allen ).
7) Remove the brackets by pushing it toward the foot end of the table until it reaches the mechanical end stop
8) Remove the frame at the upper edge of the bellows on the right and left sides of the table. The frame prevents
the bellows from coming out of the holder.
9) Remove the frame at the head and foot ends of the table as well. Loosen 2 screws at each end (3 mm Allen).
10) Remove the bellows from the holder on the top of the table. Begin by removing the bellows from the middle.

Lubricate the spindle nut


Lubricate the spindle nut with the lubricant: Isoflex Topas NCA 52 ( 15 90 863 ) grease gun.
1) Connect the grease gun to the lubricating nipple.
2) Squeeze until lubricant comes out of both ends.
3) Clean old lubricant from the spindle.
4) Remove the lubricant gun from the spindle nut.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance
Lubricate the guide rails in the base of the patient table
1) Clean old lubricant from the guide rails with a soft cloth.
2) Connect the grease gun to the lubricating nipple.
3) Squeeze until lubricant can be seen on the guide rail.
4) Repeat the procedure for the second guide rail.

Lubricate the linear guides on the upper part of the scissors


1) Clean old lubricant from the guide rails with a soft cloth.
2) Place the connection piece for the lubricant gun on the lubricating nipple of the guide rail to be lubricated.
3) Press lubricant into the carriage until lubricant can be seen on the guide rail.
4) Repeat the procedure for the second guide rail.

Lubricate the guide rails in the upper part of the table


The linear guides in the top support must be lubricated at both the head and foot-ends.
1) Remove the cover from the foot-end of the table by loosening two attachment screws (2.5 mm Allen).
2) Clean old lubricant from the guide rails with a soft cloth.
3) Connect the grease gun to the lubricating nipple.
4) Squeeze until lubricant can be seen on the guide rail.
5) Repeat the procedure for the second guide rail.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Lubricate the guide rails at the head-end of the table


1) Push the top support of the table toward the gantry to the end stop.
2) Push the table top toward the gantry to the end stop.
3) Remove the switch rails from both sides of the table; remove the 8 attachment screws ( Allen 2.5 mm ).
4) Clean old lubricant from the guide rails with a soft cloth.
5) Connect the grease gun to the lubricating nipple.
6) Squeeze until lubricant can be seen on the guide rail.
7) Repeat the procedure for the second guide rail.

Lubricate the linear guides in the top support of the table


Each linear guide in the top support must be lubricated at two locations.
1) Clean old lubricant from the guide rails with a soft cloth.
2) When placing the lubricant gun on the lubricating nipple, press up on the switch rail.
3) Press lubricant into the carriage until lubricant can be seen on the rails.
4) Repeat the procedure for the other locations on the guides.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Check Table Mechanics


Check horizontal cradle drive release force
The force required to move the table top (cradle) should be less than or equal to 50 N.
1) Switch off the patient table.
2) Loop a cable tie through the handle at the end of the table and close it.
3) Move the Table Top toward the gantry (approximately 100 mm).
4) Move the Top Support toward the gantry (approximately 100 mm).
5) Hook the spring gauge into the cable tie.
6) Pull the tabletop, using the spring gauge, until It reaches the end stop. Use a constant effort.
7) Record the force required to move the tabletop.

Check horizontal top support drive release force


The force required to move the top support should be less than or equal to 100 N.
1) Pull the top support using the spring gauge toward the foot-end of the table.
2) Ensure that the force remains constant.
3) Read the force required to move the top support.

Check the compression spring in the patient table


Check the spring for mechanical damage such as cracks or breaks.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance
Check the attachment of the patient positioning accessories
Inspect the patient positioning accessories for damage ( i.e. head cradle, holder, pads...).
Check the accessory bracket at the head-end of the table for damage.
Check the locking mechanism on the patient positioning accessories. Repair if needed.
Check the table safety limit switches
Correct adjustment of the switch point ensures that the table stops immediately upon reaching an obstruction.
The switch point determines how far the table travels in the vertical direction after making contact with an object.
The switch contacts should be 1 to 2 mm apart.
1) Measure the distance from the upper edge of the table to the lower edge of the switch rail.
2) Push the switch rail upward until it reaches the mechanical end stop.
3) Measure the distance from the upper edge of the table and the lower edge of the switch rail.
4) The difference between the two measurements should be 20 ± 1.5 mm.
5) If the value specified above is not reached, check the side covers as well as the switch rail for mechanical
damage.
6) Repeat the measurements of the vertical movement of the other switch rail as well.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Cabinet Maintenance
Check the water pressure
1) To measure the water pressure, switch off the Water Cooling System (WCS)
2) Remove the front cover from the Cooling Cabinet.
3) Place the manometer on the valve for the gantry cooling system.
The nominal pressure for the gantry is 2.0 bar ± 0.2 bar.
4) Place the manometer on the valve for the cabinet cooling system.
The nominal pressure for the cooling cabinet is 2.0bar ± 0.2bar.
5) Install the front cover on the heat exchanger.

Replace the air filters if present


The Somatom PLUS 4C has an air filter in the Imaging cabinet and another in the Generator cabinet.
1) Remove the front cover from the cabinet to make it accessible.
2) Replace the air filter.
3) Install the front cover.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Unit Care
Clean the system before returning it to the customer. Do not use sprays because they seep into components
possibly damaging parts or forming flammable vapor. Do not use abrasive solutions. Do not use cleaning agents
containing the following substances:
• aldehyde
• acetone
• spot remover
• benzine
• alcohol (exceptions: alcohol may be used to clean the monitor screens)
• ammonia
• agents containing silicone
• phenol-based or chlorine-releasing disinfectants
Approved agents
For cleaning the gantry and table sides, tabletop pad, cushions, arm and knee supports and head holder, the
following agents may be used:
• Tego, 10% vol.
• Gigasept, 6% vol.
• Somplex Perfekt AC, 2% vol.
• Melsitt, 10% vol. (causes minor discoloration)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Clean the Surfaces


Clean the gantry/table surfaces
Remove contrast agent residues immediately by wiping with a damp cloth.
Clean the console monitor screen
The monitor screen has a sensitive anti-reflective coating.∙ Clean the screen with a soft cloth. Pure alcohol or
alcohol with 1 /3 or 2/3 distilled water may be used. Do not use cleaning solutions.
Clean the outside of the camera with a soft cloth.
Clean the optical disk ( optional )
If the optical disk surface is contaminated, spray it with dry compressed nitrogen gas.
Never rub or wipe the optical disk with chemical solutions because they can make the disk unreadable.
Clean the accessories made of Plexiglas
Use only " Plexiklar ", soap suds, or a diluted commercially available liquid cleaning solution.
Clean the mouse
If the mouse requires cleaning:
1) Remove the cover ring over the roller ball compartment by twisting it counterclockwise.
2) Remove, clean and dry the roller ball.
3) Blow any dirt or dust from the roller ball compartment.
4) Place the roller ball back into the compartment and reattach the cover.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

How to Install Unit Covers


Patient Table
Move the table to a comfortable work position between 800 and 1000 mm (317 to 117 at the gantry keypads) using
the corresponding keys on the gantry operating panel or the service key on the table.
Note When using the manual table height adjustment nut, do not raise the table higher than 1000 mm
(117 at the gantry panels ).
1) Pull the bellows over the patient table, start at the foot-end and move toward the head-end of the table.
2) Move the patient table and hook the bellows into the aluminum rails of the patient table.
3) Reattach both brackets for the bellows.
4) Attach the plate covers and switch rails to the upper part of the patient table.
5) Attach the cover plate over board D35 at the foot-end of the patient table.
6) Attach the cover plate over the frame connecting the gantry and the patient table.
Gantry Plexistrip
1) Install the plexistrip in the gantry opening by first unscrewing the front and rear gantry funnels slightly.
2) Insert the plexistrip completely into the guide groove of the gantry funnel starting from the top.
3) Turn the strip so that the space in the ring is in the two o'clock position.
4) Secure the plexistrip in the opening by slightly tightening the four threaded screws.
5) Install the gantry funnel.
6) Lower the patient table to minimum position and close the front door of the gantry.
7) Attach the back gantry panel if it was removed.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

How to Test the Protective Conductor


Note All metal system covers have a plug or screw connection for the protective conductor.
Ensure that the protective conductor cable is connected to this point when the system covers
are installed. The protective conductor cable is included with the components.
Note Use the protective conductor testing device (P/N 4415899 or GE equivalent).
Note The protective conductor resistance must be less than 100 milliOhms.
Protective Grounds are labled PE
Unroll the cable completely from the device before you perform the test to ensure correct results.
Measure the protective conductor resistance from the PDS protective conductor terminal to:
• PDS/IMS
• Gantry
• Table
• Camera

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Preventive Maintenance

Check System Quality PROCEDURE TABLE


1) Raise the table to 145 as indicated on the gantry display.
2) Center the water phantom in the scan plane using the laser cross hairs.
3) If necessary, switch from the Customer to Service mode. System… Change Mode…
4) Select Scan Setup… Quality… Constancy
5) Enter your name in the provided line.
6) Follow the instructions as they appear. The program will provide information as Noise values, air values, water
values, light marker accuracy, and table feed accuracy.
7) Make hard copies of the results for the customer.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Software and Diagnostics

System Startup All Drop Down Menus


Host Commands Scan Setup Software
Software Environment Parameters (printenv) Service Programs
Networking System Configuration
System Performance How to Reload MCB’s (MSI)
How to Test the Sparc Computer About Software Parameter Tables (TFx)
Sparc Log Files How to Load Tube Parameter Files
How to Test the SMI (hte) How to Load Collimator Parameters
How to Use Laptop to Run hte How to Program API and Intercom Unit
How to Set Timezone System Shutdown

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

System Startup
The scanner must boot the UNIX operating system that controls the Sparc host before it can boot the specialized
software that runs the scanner on top of this base. This specialized software is called Somaris and is referred to as
the application software. If the computer won’t boot, or is having other problems, you’ll need to use Sun commands,
error logs and utilities to troubleshoot. The Siemens service software cannot help you because it is not up.
When power is applied, the Sparc performs tests on its CPU, RAM and SCSI bus. This firmware level is called
Command Mode. After selftests pass, the host will start the UNIX operating system. After UNIX is running,
Somaris is started.
When the computer starts the scanner, it uses the MCU to wake up all the controllers. The green “Cycle” LED on
each MCB will begin to flash. The MCU will initialize, wait for each to load appropriate parameter files, verify MCB
versions, then restore the STOP/Report circuit. The MCBs will check their loaded parameter tables and turn off its
red STOP LED if all is well. With verification that the Stop Circuit is working, the MCU will load and enable scan
modes and code.
Once Somaris is running, you can use: System… End… Application to go to the UNIX level.
To go to Command Mode from the UNIX level, enter: login then halt
To go to UNIX level from command mode, enter: boot
To start applications from the UNIX level, enter: login as somaris

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Host Commands
To use these commands, the host computer must be in command mode. A caret prompt is visible on the monitor.
To start new command, enter: n
Command What it will do
boot boots the default SCSI device.
show-devs displays a list of all device tree nodes.
devalias displays a lhhist of all device aliases.
.traps displays a list of SPARC trap types.
.version displays the firmware release.
.idprom displays the ethernet address and the serial number.
.enet-addr displays the ethernet address only.
banner displays the defined banner.
printenv displays the values in NVRAM that define the software environment.
setenv variable value changes the selected NVRAM variable to the new value.
set-defaults sets the values to the default values.
help displays the available test categories and subcategories.
help xxxxx gives you information about xxxxx category or subcategory.
test /memory tests memory at power up as predefined in the NVRAM.
test-all tests all devices below the root node.
watch-net monitors the network traffic.
watch-clock tests the basic function of the timing system.
probe-scsi tests the on-board SCSI bus, important when system won’t boot.
probe-scsi-all tests all installed SCSI buses.
old-mode exits new command and returns the display to the boot prompt.
reset exits new command and performs a reboot to application level.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Software Environment Parameters (printenv)


Parameter Name Required Value Default value Has to be changed
tpe-link-test true true
etq-testaera 0 0
bootflash-load-base 4294967295 4294967295
bootflash-#devices 0 0
bootflash-#megs 0 0
wd-ena? false false
level-15-intr-ena? true true
output-device screen screen
input-device keyboard keyboard
keyboard-click false false
keymap
ttyb-rts-dtr-off false false
ttyb-ignore-cd true true
ttya-rts-dtr-off false false
ttya-ignore-cd true true
ttyb-mode 9600,8,n,1,- 9600,8,n,1,-
ttya-mode 9600,8,n,1,- 9600,8,n,1,-
fcode-debug? false false
local-mac-address? false false
screen-#columns 106 80 X
screen-#rows 46 34 X
selftest-#megs 1 1
scsi-initiator-id 7 7
silent-mode? false false
auto-boot? true true

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics
printenv settings continued

Parameter Name Required Value Default value Has to be changed


watchdog-reboot? false false
diag-file
diag-device net net
boot-file
boot-device disk0 net disk net X
sbus-probe-list 541230 541230
use-nvramrc? false false
nvramrc
sunmon-compat? false false
security-mode none none
security-password
security-#badlogins 0 <no default>
oem-logo <no default>
oem-logo? false false
oem-banner <no default>
oem-banner? false false
hardware-revision 001 <no default>
last-hardware-update 0 <no default>
testaera 0 0
mfg-switch? false false
diag-switch? false false

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Networking
How to Check Network Status (watch-net)
1) Check network configuration with System… Config… Network; check that nodes exist and are online.
2) Open Service… Laboratory and use command ping to check ability of remote node to receive data.
Example: ping 172.24.243.2
3) Check hardware connections (look for green link lights on transceivers).
4) Go to UNIX command mode and monitor network activity with watch-net

How to Unblock FTP access and enable network access:


1) Open Service… Laboratory
2) % su
3) password: enter su password
4) #cd /usr
5) #mv inetd.conf inetd.conf.secure
6) #sed -e ‘/^#ftp/s/#ftp/ftp/’ inetd.conf.secure > inetd.conf
7) #cd /usr/somaris/run/service
8) #EnableNetServices
9) Exit

Go to Host Commands
Review Drop Down Menus

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

System Performance
If the system is becoming sluggish, mouse slow to respond:
1) Verify all studies are filmed and archived.
2) Do a ds_recovery located under System… Run… while in service mode.
3) Delete all patient files.
4) Cleanup directories located under System… Run… while in service mode.
5) Delete all patients files again.
6) Reboot with: reboot –

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Test the Sparc Computer


Use SUNDIAG to check host memory and devices.
To start SUNDIAG, the host computer must be at UNIX level. Enter: sundiag
To deselect all tests, enter: tests none
To select all tests, enter: tests all
To start the selected test(s), enter: start
To stop all tests, enter: stop
To stop a particular active test, enter its command to toggle it.
mem physical memory
kmem virtual memory
sd1 SCSI disk for primary image stoarge
sd3 SCSI disk for secondary image storage
fpu CPU Floating Point Unit
le0 Ethernet bus
zs0 Serial bus
audio Audio processing
bpp0 Parallel bus
To exit SUNDIAG, enter: quit

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Sparc Log Files


At UNIX level, the SUNDIAG command: logfiles displays the log files stored in directory: /usr/adm/sundiaglog
You must know how to use vi editor to navigate these error logs.
Key vi editor commands:
To page forward and backward: Ctl + F and Ctl + B.
To retum to the Logfile Menu, enter: q!

Sparc Error Log


Enter: name error then display to display the /var/adm/sundiaglog/sundiag.err file in the vi editor.

Sparc Info Log


Enter: name info then display to display the information file.

Sparc Unix Log


Enter: name unix then display to display the login history that contains the host name, vmunix, device type, time
and date of the that login.

To remove a log file, enter remove rather than display after the name.
To return to the previous menu, enter done.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Test the SMI (hte)


There are two ways to test the boards responsible for converting raw measurement data into image data: application
software (somaris) and HTE, the Hardware Test Environment (UNIX macros).
In the graphical application mode, you simply click on the board's symbol to select it for testing.
In the HTE macro mode, a test is started by typing the component's three digit D-number after "smi", the board
number if more than one, and an option like “all” or “quick.” Software must be at the UNIX level.
EXAMPLE: To do a quick test of the second Imager board, type: smi070:2/quick
Board Number Test Description
SIAM-C D21 smi021 System Interface And Memory with Cable interface Recon Master
IMA-ML D70 smi070:1 or smi070:2 Imager with LISA chip Video Display
D140 Sync-Adapter connects the Imagers with each other
D151 GBUS front connector connects both Imagers to the SIAM
Maxicam D66 smi066 Extended Interface for Camera Camera Interface
BP-4/25 D83B smi083:1 or smi083:2 Backprojector Boards
AP-D D57 smi057 Array Processor with Discrete processors
P-Mod D160 Processor-Module is a module added to the AP-D that doubles its performance
MAP-4 D55 smi055:1 or smi055:2 Memory And Processor buffers and processes data
RPP D32 smi032 Board collects data from the Receiver board
Receiver D96 smi096 Receiver Module receives the serial measurement data arriving optically
Backplane D120 smi120
How to Use Laptop to Run hte

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Use Laptop to Run hte


1. Switch off the SMI-5.
2. Remove keyboard/mouse connector on E52.
3. Connect cable from Laptop to E52 RS232-A.
4. Start your PC emulator with the following parameters: baud = 9600, parity = n, stop bit = 1, data bits = 8
5. Switch on SMI-5. The SMI-5 will boot. During startup, ignore these error messages:
Warning: unable to determine keyboard type
Can't open input device
XNeWS: can't find the framebuffer device (/dev/fb)
6. .login: service password: (check with Technology Team)
7. somPlus4% setenv SERVICE_DIR /usr/service/
8. somPlus4% hte
9. HTE> smisys/init
If you get an error such as: “%HTE-E-WRITEERR, error writing\hteprt.dat(9; Bad filenumber)\
Enter the following commands:
HTE> protocol/init
rm: override protection 644 for hteprt.dat? y
HTE> errlog/init
rm: override protection 644 for hteerr.dat? y
(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics
Laptop hte continued

Execute individual tests for components of the SMI-5


.
then: .
10. HTE> exit
----
11. somPlus4% exit
----
12. ..login: halt
----
13. Switch off the SMI-5, disconnect the laptop and reconnect the keyboard/mouse connector on E52.
14. Switch on the SMI-5 and continue normal operation.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Set Timezone

1) Enter SERVICE MODE (System… Change Mode… Service # )


2) Select Service… Laboratory….
3) To view current time and timezone, enter: data
4) To view and determine command for your timezone, enter: cd /usr/share/lib/zoneinfo Then enter: ls
5) To remove incorrect timezone, enter: cd.. su then password rm localtime
6) To link software to desired timezone, enter: ln tzname localtime
7) To adjust date and system time, enter: date mmddhhnn where mm=month, dd=day, hh=hour and nn=minute
8) Exit super user mode, enter: exit
9) To review current data and time setting; enter: date
10) Exit the UNIX shell, enter: exit

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

All Drop Down Menus

Patient: Scan Mode: Image: Display: System: File: Scan Setup: Evaluation: Filming: *Service:
Select Topo Select Screen Logbook Copy Feed Statistics Interactive Adjust
Current Sequence Survey Text Keys Delete Tilt Distance List Tabgen
Register Spiral Ima – Window Refresh Info Reset Magnify Job Control Test
Renew Serio Ima + Run (macros) Mark API Axis Control
Modify Review Topo Change Mode Comment Angle MSI
Protocol Cine Procedure Checkup Manipulate Debug
Text Camera Quality Profile Analyze
Pat – Version Absorption ROI
Pat + End Filter Ring
End *Config Volume Tube Toolkit
VAR Laboratory
3D Imaging
Dynamics

* Service options only available if OEM software is loaded and DMLA password entered through Change Mode

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Scan Setup Software


Several Service Tools can be found under Scan Setup… on the top menu bar.
• Feed Horizontal table drive
• Tilt Gantry Tilt
• Reset Reset scanner software
• API Record and adjust automated audio messages
• Comment
• Checkup
• Quality

Checkup is used to quickly test image quality and important scan functions.
Here is the Checkup menu:
Feed Out
Test Image
Warm Up
Calibration
Quality

GO CANCEL QUICKSTART

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Service Programs PROCEDURE TABLE


Service programs can be started from the menu bar if the site has OEM proprietary software.
Adjust Software assisted adjustments for X-ray Generation and Focus
Tabgen Programs that calibrate the DMS, Data Measurement System, DASf
Tests Tests for important system functions like CAN (control), DMS data, HTE (recon); these are
sometimes found under heading of where main controller is located like Gantry
Stationary:MCU or RTC or like Gantry Rotating: FIL, RAC, DLP or Generator: HVC, DCC
Control Control has tests for X-ray generation and focus, collimation, anode, Z, PHI, Dose
MSI Flash code and test MCB’s, function controllers on CAN and STOP/Report buses
Analyze Follow OEM DMS manual to analyze Data Measurement System
ROI Can be used to evaluate Image Quality
Ring Helps you find location of DAS and detector components that may be causing image rings
Tube ToolKit Offers many statistics on the X-ray Tube and enables loading Tube Parameters from MOD
Service Tools found under System… on the top menu bar:
Change Mode Use to switch application offerings between Customer and Service Modes
Config Use to review or change component serial numbers, to configure the site’s network
Logbook Most recent ten files started each day to log SOMARIS process errors
End Offers three ways to reset the system refer to System Shutdown

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

System Configuration PROCEDURE TABLE


Enter the somaris System Configuration application from the top menu bar. Use System… Change Mode if you are
not in Service Mode. Select System… Config...
General Define Names, language, number of monitors, site power, customer preferences
SerNo Enter the Serial Numbers for important scanner components
HostCam Begin the entries that define your site’s basic network
Device Configure storage devices
Network If this option is present, use to review/correct the extended definition of the site’s network
SMI Review what boards are present in this scanner. SMI configuration varies between models.
DNI means Decnet protocol
PLA means PACS Logical Address
The 14 digit PLA can be described as follows:
3 digits International country code 010 for US
1 digit Manufacturer Code S for Siemens
2 digits Area Code Usually A1 for all Siemens Products
2 digits Modality Type CT = CT
MR = MR
DI = DICOM
DC = MagicView/Sienet
OT = Other
2 digits Unit Number Starting with 01 must be unique for each node installed
4 digits PACSnet internal funcode 0000 = CT
RCV0 for Magicview
RCV1 for Receive only nodes
DIC1 for DICOM nodes

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Reload MCB’s


All the MCB’s are physically the same. If you are getting CAN bus errors, you can try reloading the firmware for the
faulty controller. To test whether this is a physical problem, you could interchange MCB’s, reload them with the
appropriate firmware for their new location. However, the ZCO, cannot be interchanged with another. It holds
serialized manufacturing data for the collimator. One needs Siemens’ SERPRO tool to reload the ZCO_MCB.
1) Enter SERVICE MODE (System… Change Mode… Service # )
2) Select Service… MSI….
3) Select ENV3
4) Select Display FS
5) Highlight latest files for controller from the upper window.
6) Select Load Code
7) Select Go
8) Wait for message in lower window that MASME is done.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

Software Parameter Tables


Software parameters needed to define system operation are held in tables. They get loaded into the appropriate
controller when the scanner is reset. The tables common to all controllers end in the last digit of 0 to 9. The
controller number (hex) is the middle character n. See Error Code section and System Control diagram. Each
table starts with the letter T. Tables that hold parameters specific to a controller end in the number (hex) A to F.
Tn0 SYSTEM STATE.
Tn1 FW VERSION. Version number is used to compare controller firmware and HOST software versions.
Tn2 CAN RX BUFFER. This table holds the last CAN commands sent to the controller.
Tn3 CAN TX BUFFER. This table holds the last CAN commands sent by the controller.
Tn4 ERROR PRIORITY. This table is a list that prioritizes errors.
Tn5 DEBUG. This table is a copy of controller RAM useful to software development.
Tn6 TIMEOUTS. This table is a list of default timeouts.
Tn7 COLLISION PARAMETER. This table is used on the patient handling controllers GPC, RTC, PTH, PTV.
Specific Tables
TEA This table holds the tube parameters for focus, tube voltage, tube current and filament current unique to
each tube. If the tube is changed, a new TEA table must be copied from an MOD to the HOST.
The A to F tables hold initialization information. Some are changed during adjustment and are held on the Host.
These tables are unique for every scanner. That is why it's a good idea to save the tables after adjustment.
TF0 This table defines the current scan mode to the controllers.
TF1 This table defines the timing needed for scans such as Dynamic Sequence, Serio and Volume.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Load Tube Parameter Files PROCEDURE TABLE


1) Enter the tube housing number in System… Config...
2) Open a command tool with Service… Laboratory…
3) Enter: rm ~/tube/tube history
4) Enter: exit
5) Start the Service… Tube Toolkit....
6) Select Tube Exchange and Functions.
7) Select First Installation. Enter the generator hardware counter number under "Install Scan Seconds (HW)"
8) Select Go then select Cancel.
9) Start the Scenario-Interpreter with Service… MSI... ENV 2
10) Click once in the upper white area.
11) Select Gen_Table and PERM.
12) Enter: "TEA" as file.
13) Select Read File.
14) Enter the tube housing number into the field "Serial Number"
15) Click Save File.
16) End the Scenario-Interpreter.
17) Open a command tool with Service… Laboratory….
18) Enter: tube c update.
19) Enter: exit.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Load Collimator Parameters


The pre-settings for the tube side diaphragms and the determination of the collimator’s characteristics are made at
the factory. These parameter tables are delivered on the diskette with the collimator. A Siemens’ representative
must load the collimator parameters. SERPRO is not available for GE use. Collimator parameters also need
to be loaded after system software is reloaded.
Procedure:
1) Connect the SERPRO and PC to the CT scanner's Comm Port 1 located on CIB X19.
2) Switch on SERPRO and PC.
3) Press the STOP button on the CT keyboard.
4) Start the " SERVICE.EXE " program on your PC.
5) Select Load. The program asks what interface should be used to load the parameter block. HDLC is the
default interface.
6) Select the file on the floppy shipped with the collimator.
7) Select the ZCO controller.
8) Transfer the data as parameter block 1. Enter: p then enter: 1 The program tells you the status of the
controller. The system control goes into FLASH LOAD status, the existing parameter block is deleted and the
new one is loaded.
9) Tune the system.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

How to Program API and Intercom Unit


The Automated Patient Instructions (API) and the Intercom are adjusted with software. You can set the Gantry to
Console and Console to Gantry volumes separately for the intercom unit. You can suppress gantry noise by
measuring it. The volume and noise suppression settings for the API depend on the Intercom settings.
Adjust Intercom
1) Put the system in SERVICE MODE System… Change Mode…
2) Select Scan Setup.
3) Select API.
4) Adjust audio parameters by holding and sliding the cursor over the control. Each time you change a setting,
verify the result with the customer.
Program Autovoice (API)
1) Put the system in SERVICE MODE System… Change Mode…
2) Select Scan Setup.
3) Select API.
4) Select desired instruction set 1 through 6.
5) When ready, click Record and follow the instructions in the footer line.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Software and Diagnostics

System Shutdown
There are three ways to shutdown the system properly.
Full system shutdown
Step 1.) Select the System menu from the top of the screen.
Step 2.) Select the End option from the System menu.
Step 3.) Select System/No Restart from the obtained platform.
Step 4.) Once the system has shutdown, you can press the power Off key on the keyboard.
Note: The system is fully shutdown when the message asking if you would like to reboot appears.
System shutdown with reboot
Follow the same procedures as above except for step 3. Instead, select the option System/Restart. This will end
system software (somaris) and operating software (Unix), then reboot both automatically.
Restart application software.
This option is used when you want to reboot application software only. It is executed as stated above with the
exception that at step 3, the menu option Application is selected. When the software shutdown completes, you will
receive a login prompt. At this point, enter: somaris and the system will reboot.
Irregular shutdown
This mode of shutdown should only be used as a last resort because it does not properly close file structures.
Software corruption could occur. Use it only if the software is hung and you cannot properly shutdown the system.
Procedure: Simultaneously press the Stop and blank button to the right of the spacebar. This should end the
Somaris software and allow you to restart with: somaris or instead reboot the entire system with: halt.
If this doesn’t work, press: Stop and type: A at the same time, hopefully when the hard drives are not active. If you
receive something other than an >ok prompt, type: n for new command mode to get the ok prompt. Then type:
sync instead of boot to thoroughly reboot system.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Theory
Abbreviations Generator Power
Scan Terms Relays on D670 Relay Board
SCAN PROCESS Generator Fuses
Scanner Differences – Power vs. Expert HV Generation
System Cooling Direct Current Circuit
More Temperature Control High Voltage Control
Tube Cooling High Voltage Acquisition and Tank
Dehumidifying HOW XRAYS START IN THE GENERATOR
System Control X-ray Generation
Time Critical Signals Anode Rotation
Stop Report Circuit Dose Control (Filament Current)
Scanner Power Buttons Beam Thickness and Center
Power Distribution System Beam Focus in Z Direction
PDS Service Switches Flying Focus
Power and Signal Distribution - Rotating Gantry Beam Focus in Phi Direction (Deflection)
Power Distribution for X-ray and Acquisition X-ray Detection
Patient Communication (Audio) Data Acquisition
Rotate Reconstruction
Tilt Video
Table Horizontal Alignment Lights
Table Vertical
Table Range
Table Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Abbreviations
API Automatic Patient Instruction. Recorded messages that play over the intercom to instruct the
patient when to breath.
CAN Controller Area Network responsible for system control and safety
CCI Container Control Interface Board D201 (Plus4 Expert) similar to the D203 board except less
serial & audio circuitry.
CIB Cabinet Interface Board D203 (Plus4 Power) for PALS, Intercom/Audio, Voltage & Temperature
Monitoring, Console I/O. The D203 CIB also has a D77 API_FAST board attached to it.
CTLDAT Control Data that flows through slip rings between the stationary and rotating parts of the gantry
DCC Direct Current Circuit. Denotes the cap bank chassis in the generator.
DMS Data Measurement System or Data Acquisition System
FC The scanner uses three Frequency Converters for Rotation, Tilt and Vertical Drive
GPC Gantry Panel Control describes the MCB programmed for gantry and table positioning and safety
HDLC High Level Data Link Control is the type of communication used between the Sparc and MCU
HTE Hardware Test Environment. Describes a software program used to test the SMI-5 imager.
ICS Imaging Control System, denotes the Host computer and its disk drives
ICT Interventional CT uses a C-Arm betweeen the gantry and table to perform Patient Blood Flow
imaging
IMS Imaging System. Usually denotes the cabinet that the SMI is in.
IRS Image Reconstruction System, denotes SMI Imager boards
LIMA Light Marker, Laser alignment light (continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

LPS Light barrier board used with the slotted AP ring for Rotation Position and Speed Control
MCB Master Controller Board is generic hardware until the MSI software programs it for a particular
function
MCU Master Controller Unit describes the MCB programmed to master the CAN bus, located in left
pedestal
OPC Operators Console
PDS Power Distribution System is located in the base of a separate cabinet
PHC & PHS Patient Handling Control & Patient Handling System
PSS Power Supply Stationary describes where power enters the gantry
RAC Rotate Anode Control. Denotes the E560 chassis responsible for anode rotation control.
RTC & RTS Rotating and Tilt Control & Rotating and Tilt System
SLR Slip Rings
SMI SIEMENS Medical Imaging System
SOMARIS Somatom Measurement and Imaging System. Siemens application software.
UFC Ultra Fast Ceramic. Denotes an optional solid state detector found in some systems
WCS Water Cooling System
XRS X-Ray System. Usually denotes the chassis that contains the filament, focus, and collimator
control boards

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Scan Terms
Dynamic Multiscan Multirotational scanning with continuous data acquisition at a single slice location.
Dynamic Serio Fast scan sequence at a single slice location to record density changes over time
following contrast medium injection.
ICT Interventional CT is a scan mode where the doctor remains by the patient; the table top
moves into the gantry rather than out, and the console cannot tilt the gantry.
OSTEO Optional method of scanning the lumbar vertebrae for determination of mineral salt
content. The evaluation of which relates to the degeneration or brittleness of the bone.
PACS NET Network for exchange of data between different models of scanners and workstations.
Tomogram Axial and rapid sequential scanning with high resolution, incremental table feed,
concurrent and asynchronous image reconstruction and display.
Topogram Survey radiogram (scout) for patient positioning with diagnostic image quality.
Spiral MXP Rapid volume scanning with gapless data acquisition and continuous table feed for up
to 60 seconds of radiation.
Xenon Measurement and evaluation of cerebral blood flow.

Optional Scan Modes


Osteo
Pulmo CT

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Scan Process
1. Host computer senses that the Start Button was pressed at the console, and sends the “Start” command
to the MCU (Master Control Unit) MCB Micro Controller D333 in the left pedestal.
2. The MCU MCB puts the command on the CAN (Controller Area Network) bus where it travels through
the slip ring to the DMS (Data Measurement System) MCB board on the ACU_2 board, where it sets the
“SE” command.
3. The SE command in turn sets the DMS “XCENA” signal which travels back through the CTL_DAT_RS
slip rings back to the MCU board where it sets the “XCGen” Signal going to the stationary generator;
which in turn turns the high voltage on.
4. The XRS (Xray System) sends the “Dose_Ok” signal back to the DMS MCB board as soon as the tube
FOC_MON sensor detects Xrays are on at the tube.
5. The DMS MCB then sets the DMS “Start” bit which turns integrator auto zeroing off and tells the ACU_1
board to start scanning (reading the detector) and send the DAS data to the SMI.
6. During axial (rotating) scanning the position of the gantry is being reported from the RTC (Rotate and Tilt
Controller) through the control slip rings to ACU_2 where it is included in the DAS data going to the SMI.
7. When the scan is near the end, the ACU_1 board sets the “Last_Readings” signal high which in turn
sends the “PreXrayOff” signal to the XRS to let it know to stop boosting the tube filaments in 750 micro
seconds.
8. When “Last Readings” signal goes back down it turns the DMS “XCENA” signal off, which tells the
generator to turn Xrays off, and the last reading is sent to the SMI.
9. When the Xrays cease the XRS “Dose_Ok” signal goes low and the AZC Auto Zero Continues Signal
goes back high to keep the ADC’s zeroed.
A spiral scan takes place the same way a single scan does except that the end of the scan is signaled with the
“START_MONO” signal from the ACU_2 board instead of the “LAST_READING” signal from the ACU_1.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Scanner Differences – Power vs. Expert

Power Expert
Sparc 10 computer in larger IMS cabinet Sparc 5 computer in smaller IMS cabinet
Host Interface is CIB D203 Host Interface is CCI D201 (less serial and audio circuitry)
IMS powered independently of console Smaller IMS derives power from console X254
SMI has 2-4 MAP, 2 BJ, 2 IMA SMI usually has 1 MAP, 1 BJ, 1 IMA
Dual monitor Usually just one monitor
EOS (electro-optical sender) for each CRT No EOS
55 kW Generator 45 kW Generator
PDS in bottom of IMS cabinet PDS in Generator cabinet
PDS X261 wired 2-3 to turn on WCS with EVA ON PDS X261 wired 1-2 to not turn on WCS with EVA ON
WCS water cools HV Tank as well as gantry WCS only water cools gantry

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
System Cooling
The gantry, generator, and imager are cooled by a cold water circulation system called the Water Cooling System
(WCS). The heat that is generated in the tube and gantry electronics is removed by two air to water radiators and
fans (M304, M305) located in the gantry. The radiators are supplied cold water by the WCS water pumps. The
water that travels between the gantry and WCS is in a pressurized closed loop system. The heat in the water from
the gantry is removed when the water travels through a copper heat exchanger block in the WCS that is cooled by
hospital supplied chilled water. The heat created in the generator and imager cabinets is removed in a similar
fashion if the model of the CT is a Plus 4 Power. If it's a Plus 4 Expert then the generator and imager are air
cooled.
The WCS uses water pipe temperature sensors and three way valves (2M3 and 2M4) to keep the Gantry water
temperature at 18 - 28°C (depending on cooling requirements) and the Generator / Imager water temperature at
25°C. The valves open when cooling is needed and allow more of the closed circuit water to be cooled by the
chilled copper heat exchanger block. The valves close, bypassing the copper block, when cooling is not needed.
WCS Temperature Monitoring
The WCS controller monitors Gantry and Generator / Imager water temperature (sensors 2R2 and 2R5), as well as
gantry air temperature (B304/1R1), hospital supplied chilled water temperature (2R4), and the water pumps. The
status of these sensors can be viewed at the WCS Controller Board. If the Gantry water temperature is not 17 -
30°C or the Generator / Imager water temperature is not 20 - 35°C, the WCS controller will issue a "TEMP" error
which will be visible on the WCS display panel. If the TEMP error stays on for over 15 minutes, or if one of the
water pumps overheats, the WCS controller will issue a "SUM" error. SUM errors are reported to the MCU board in
left pedestal and will cause scanning to cease. Also, if the hospital chilled water temperature goes over 20°C the
controller will engage the 2Y1 and 2Y2 input and bypass solenoids which will stop hospital water from running
through the copper block.

(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
More Temperature Control
PDS Temperature Monitoring
In addition to WCS temperature monitoring, there is PDS temperature monitoring. The main power relays that
supply power to the Gantry and the Imager are held in by temperature sensors in the Gantry and Imager. If the
gantry temperature exceeds 42°C, the B305 switch trips, causing the PDS K4 relay to disengage and remove all
mains power from the gantry. If the Imager temperature exceeds 60°C, the CIB board will cause the PDS K3 relay
to disengage, removing main power to the Imager and Host computer. If the Imager turns off at 60°C, it will not
come back on again, after cooling, unless the S2 Temp reset switch is pressed on the CIB board, or the whole CT
is turned off and back on again.
Gantry, IMS, Generator, and DAS Temperature Monitoring
The Gantry GPC board in the right pedestal uses the B303 35°C temperature switch to monitor gantry air
temperature. If the switch activates the GPC board sends a message over the CAN bus to the host computer
which informs the operator and disables scanning.
The IMS's CIB board uses 50°C temperature switches to monitor IMS cabinet air temperature. If one of these
switches open, the CIB issues a warning through the Host computer to inform the operator.
The Generator has three monitoring systems; the D650 board monitors temperature of the cap bank chassis, the
D640 monitors the temperature of the inverter chassis, and the D640 also monitors an over temperature switch
mounted on the tank.
The DMS has one 50°C over temperature switch mounted on the DAS. If it trips, the ACU_2 board reports it on
the CAN bus and turns off the APU DAS power supply.
If the site has a UFC detector, the Heater Control Board D504 monitors Detector temperature. The D515
board mounted on the detector distributes the power from the Detector Heater Control Board to the heating pads
and passes the sensor signals back. Its errors are relayed to the ACU_2 and the CAN.

(Tube Cooling on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Tube Cooling
The TUBE SYSTEM is cooled by oil and air. As soon as the scanner is switched on, the oil pump is supplied with
power which forces oil flow through the heat exchanger and TUBE SYSTEM. Circulated gantry air passes through
the heat exchanger to cool down the oil.
The tube's oil temperature and pressure are monitored by the DLP_MCB, using three DELPHI signals:
AN monitors the tube's thermal coupling.
tpfail monitors when tube temperature reaches 80°C.
pfail monitors tube oil pressure which will increase with temperature.
The tube cooling system consists of the external Pump E590 (w/ expansion chamber), the detachable hosing, and
the Heat Exchanger Radiator.
The E590 pump gets its 230 Vac supply from the Trafo Unit Fuse 1. The expansion chamber allows for pressure
fluctuations during Pump On/Off, and acts as a reservoir for the oil as it gets hot.
The Heat Exchanger Radiator pulls the ambient cool air from inside the gantry through the radiator into the inner air
chamber that circles the gantry. This warmed air is then pulled out of the chamber by the two gantry stationary air to
water radiators and cooled by the water from the Water Cooling System before being put back into the gantry as
ambient cool air.
The detachable hosing at the tube allows the tube to be removed without getting air in the oil circulation system.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Dehumidifying
A dehumidifier built into the gantry controls the humidity. The sensor B302 is a resistor whose resistance varies with
the relative air humidity inside the gantry. The dehumidifier is off when the relative humidity is under 20%. It is ON
when it is over 30%.
The moisture is blown into the scan room. The dehumidifier (E321) has a single phase power supply that is
switched off by PDS F9 or F11 when system power is removed. On some models, the dehumidifier may remain ON
even when a gantry over temperature condition from B305 (42°C temperature) to PDS removes three phase gantry
power via PDS K4. Refer to Power Distribution to Rotating Gantry Theory for detail about Dehumidifier power.
When the dehumidifier is on, it works continuously without regulation until the relative humidity drops below 20%. A
rotating catalyst extracts the humidity. It has three surfaces and rotates about once every minute. Hot air blown
through one of the surfaces dries it. Cool air blown through another surface cools the hot surface.
The GPC monitors B302 (humidity) and B303 (35°°C temperature). It issues a warning via the CAN bus to the
host when the humidity sensor detects a humidity level greater than 70% or gantry temperature approaches 100°F.
The dehumidifier has the following LEDs:
Green ON: Power (PSS F307) available
Yellow ON: Dehumidifier working (humidity over 30%)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

System Control
The Siemens Plus 4 scanner uses 12 identical circuit boards called MCB or D333 to manage system control. Each
processor on the board is or can be programmed by the Service MSI software (Service… MSI…) to perform its
unique function. This can be used for troubleshooting; it must be used when a new MCB is installed.
These 12 function controllers create the Controller Area Network or CAN bus. It consists of a 40 mA, 24 V loop
of two wires driven by the one programmed as the Master Controller. Along this bus, all parameters, commands
and errors are distributed. Failures noted on this bus are logged and will STOP the scanner.
MCU Master Control Unit is the main interface between the host (Sparc) and the other controllers.
RTC Rotate and Tilt Controller is located with the MCU in the gantry left pedestal.
GPC Gantry Panel Control in the right pedestal manages all functions done by the two operator panels.
PTV Patient Table Vertical controller is located in the table base near the foot end, left side.
PTH Patient Table Horizontal controller is located under the Table Top, inside the Top Support
DCC Direct Current Circuit controller generates a DC voltage used by the HVC and the RAC.
HVC High Voltage Controller controls high voltage generation needed to make X-ray.
RAC Rotating Anode Control watches for anode drive frequency (speed) and tube stator current errors.
FIL Filament controller monitors tube current and dose in order to regulate the X-ray beam.
DLP Det. diaphragm, LIMA, and Phi controller manage beam position, laser lights, and left/right focus.
ZCO Z-Controller for tube diaphragm control of in/out focus position and helps do slice thickness.
ACU Acquisition Control Unit on ACU_2 inside C Box facilitates data acquisition and GAN_ROT CAN/STOP.
All time critical signals are hardwired and connected in parallel to the CAN bus. A failure anywhere on the CAN
bus is backed up by a STOP loop. The MCB’s can OPEN the loop, thus halting the scanner. The CAN and STOP
loops can be tested with Service… Test…

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Time Critical Signals


Because the CAN does not operate in real time, time critical signals are hardwired parallel to the CAN between
function controllers. Hardwired signals are key to accurate and safe scanner operation. They are as follows:
Source Name Description
HOST/Console START Hardware Scan Start from console travels HDLC to the gantry’s MCU
ACU(_2) XCENA XC Enable. Tells the MCU that conditions at the ACU indicate OK to scan.
ACU(_2) EVENREA Even Reading. Indicator of an even reading number. Sent to DLP to
synchronize the focus deflection with data acquisition.
ACU(_2) PREXRAYOFF Pre X-Ray Off. Set 750 ms before the end of a scan. Used by the FIL controller
to switch over from dose rate to Filament current control.
DLP XRAY ON X-Ray On. While radiation is detected by the DLP controller, this signal is sent
to ZCO and FIL
DLP TUBE ARC Tube Arcing. Indicator of tube arcing is sent to ACU_2.
DLP FIL_DOSE Filament Dose. Analog feedback of the actual radiation intensity to ZCO and
FIL for dose rate regulation and control.
FIL DOSE_OK Dose OK. This FIL signal is sent to ACU_2 if XRAY ON is set and the FIL
controller has changed to dose rate control because HV is ON.
MCU XCGEN X-ray Control Gen is formed by the MCU; it informs the HVC to switch high
voltage on or off depending on signals from the gantry and console
DCC UDC OK Direct Current Circuit OK. Must be OK to enable HVC to switch on the high
voltage. UDC (100 to 400 V) from generator’s DCC travels the Power Slip
Rings to start rotating the anode.
(continued on next page)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Source Name Description
HVC XRAYGen Acknowledgment signal to MCU that the HVC has turned tube high voltage ON
(Tube voltage 20 kV).
RTC AP0/90/Index Angular Pulses 0°, 90° and Index are generated in the MCU_RTC, from the
slotted AP ring and LPS signals. These pulses become part of the Control
Data that is relayed to the ACU controller to determine the current rotating
frame position needed for proper data acquisition.
PTH HTP Horizontal Table Position. These extremely critical pulses are detected on
the PTH in the table support, transferred to the PTV in the table base, then
delivered to the MCU_RTC in the left pedestal. Here it is turned into Control
Data that travels the Control Data Slip Rings to be used by the ACU_2
controller to know the current table position needed for proper data acquisition.
SMI Moni_Video Monitor Video signal from the Imager Board(s) to the console monitor(s).

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Stop Report Circuit


The STOP buttons on the console and gantry and any controller (D333) can stop the scanner. Activation of any of
these will remove power from or apply brakes to moving or radiating components. When any controller opens the
Stop Report Circuit for noting a critical error, all controllers detect the open circuit.
Perhaps the weakest link of this system are the control signals that must pass through the slip rings. The controls
for X-ray Generation and Data Acquisition reside inside this boundary. The ACU_MCB in the C Box is the first to
receive the CAN instructions. They are passed to the XC Box then the RAC Box.
The Controller Area Network (CAN) with its Stop/Report circuit enters the XC box through XC Side 2 D576. There it
enters the XC Backplane to Z_CON, DELPHI, FIL_CON. It travels out to the RAC Box to RAC_CON through XC
Side 1 D571. The loop returns in the reverse order.
In the STOP state:
The MCU opens K3 on GEN Relay Bd D670 prevents HV
The MCU opens K1 on TAB PTH Bd D701 prevents horizontal table movement
The MCU opens K6 on TAB PTV Bd D702 prevents vertical table movement
The MCU opens D321, D322, D323, D324 in GAN PSS prevents gantry rotation and tilt
The DCC sets UDC at 100 Vdc so that RAC can stop anode rotation
The RAC sets the anode brake to less than 4 Hz.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Power Distribution System


The PDS provides AC power to everything within the CT except for the generator’s high current inverter needs. The
generator requires its own dedicated mains supply from the wall panel for this. The PDS does supply 230 Vac to
the generator’s low voltage DC power supply, which is how it turns the generator on.
The PDS is connected to the SYS ON and EVA ON buttons on the keyboard. It is important to be reminded that
power is always present at the on and off buttons.
The PDS can accept many different input voltages between 380 to 480 Vac (delta). The PDS can also be
configured to accept 50 or 60 cycle power. The PDS does not require a Neutral input wire; it creates its own neutral
with the T1 transformer.
The mains input voltage is connected directly to the T1 transformer, where it can be strapped to accept multiple
input voltages. After traveling through the T1 transformer, the voltage is distributed through the F1 and F2 breakers
to all of the subsystems. If the CT is connected to 50 Hz power, the F2 breaker is not used, and the F1 breaker
feeds all subsystems, including the WCS X262 jumper block. If 60 Hz power is present, the WCS X262 jumper
block is set to feed the WCS from the F2 breaker only.
The PDS is also designed to protect the CT from getting too hot. Refer to System Cooling.
The PDS G1 24 Vdc power supply (located behind the breaker panel) provides power for the following:
• Keyboard SYS ON and EVA ON switches and their lamps
• Generator D670 Relay board (D670 relays K1, K2 & K5)
• PDS relays K1, K2, K3, K6
• PDS lamps H1 & H2
POWER PLUS 4: The PDS is located in the bottom of the IMS.
EXPERT PLUS 4: The PDS is located in the bottom of the generator cabinet.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Scanner Power Buttons
The CT can be turned on two different ways. On the keyboard, there are two power ON buttons, the “SYS ON” and
the “EVA ON” buttons. These buttons can be pushed in any order you choose, just not too quickly.
When the SYS ON button is pressed, the PDS K2 relay will latch on and energize the K3, K4, K5 & K6 relays,
which turns on all of the CT. The K2 relay also closes the WCS_ON1/2 loop which tells the water cooler to turn
both the gantry & IMS pumps on.
When the EVA ON button is pressed the PDS K1 relay will latch on which energizes the K3 relay turning on power
to the console, host computer, and imager.
Plus-4 POWER: The EVA ON button also energizes the K6 relay (X261 set 2 – 3) which turns on the WCS and the
IMS water pump, but not the gantry pump since the WCS_ON1/2 loop is open (K2 off).
Plus-4 EXPERT: The EVA ON button does not energize the K6 relay (X261 set 1-2) and the WCS is off. The
Expert’s imager is air cooled, not water cooled.
EVA ON can enable optional archive devices if wired that way.
The OFF button disconnects the keyboard from the PDS control voltage called 24V_Keyboard. The Off signal line
holds the PDS relays in the activated state with their self-holding contacts. When this signal line is opened, it
releases the PDS relays K1 and K2 and disables power to all components.
The PDS 24V control voltage supplies the console, IMS, WCS and GAN temperature loops, which in-turn
controls the power relays for the corresponding component. It also supplies the GEN NS Relay circuit.
Note The PDS-Generator loop does no temperature monitoring. It is shorted inside the generator.
However, the DCC opens Temp1 fuse on E602 when its temperature exceeds 70°C
If the temperature inside the SMI and Host (IMS) cabinet is below 60°C, that temperature loop is closed by the CIB
D203. This activates relay K3 and the line voltages are enabled to the IMS Cabinet and the Console. However, if
the IMS cabinet temperature exceeds 60°C, the loop is opened by the CIB and K3 cuts off power.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

PDS Service Switches


Two switches inside the PDS allow you to modify power distribution for service purposes.
The switch S1 is called "SERVICE PHS." It has two contacts. One contact, like S2, opens the gantry and generator
temperature loops which disconnects the Gantry, PHS (Patient Handling System) and Generator from power while
still allowing evaluation mode.
The other contact directly connects the PHS (Patient Handling System) to power bypassing relay K4, even when the
whole unit or the gantry is switched off. This allows raising and lowering the patient table with the service buttons for
service purposes. Thus, the table can be used to lift the tube during replacement.
Lamp H1 indicates the patient table is under power.
The switch S2 "SERVICE EVALUATION" turns off the Gantry, PHS and Generator. It is similar to EVA_ON except
this switch inhibits the "SYS ON" button at the console.
The S2 switch disconnects the temperature loops of the gantry and generator from ground. This causes the relays
K4 for the gantry and the table and K5 for the generator to cut off power. This causes the gantry, table and
generator to de-energized. The other components remain on or can be switched on.
Lamp H2 indicates that Service Evaluation is on.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Power Distribution for X-ray and Acquisition


The Power Distribution (D575) of the XC Box provides power to the:
X4 DPU
X3 Trafo Unit
X6 RAC fan
X7 XC Box fan
325 V to FIL_CON (D572)via D570 BACKPLANE
The Digital Power Unit (DPU) provides power to the:
XC Box backplane (D570) which powers the XC Box boards, XCSIDE_1, XCSIDE_2
XCSIDE_1 (D571) powers the laser lights, detector diaphragm motor and encoder and Z_MON
XCSIDE_2 (D576) powers the collimator diaphragm motors, encoders and PHI_AMP
RAC backplane (D98)
ACU_2 (D513) on the C Box
DMS Data SLR_DRV (D415)
The Trafo Unit (E535) or gantry transformer supplies power to the:
Analog Power Unit (APU) supplies both the C Box (DMS Control) and DMS backplanes.
Tube Pump (E590)
C Box fan
DAS fans
Detector High Voltage (DHV) Board (D40) if the system has an IC detector

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Power and Signal Distribution to Rotating Gantry


AC power for the XRS (X-ray System) and DMS (Data Measurement System) enters the rotating portion of the
gantry through the Power slip rings and goes to the Power Distribution Board D575 (PDB).
If the scanner has an UFC detector, the Detector Heater Board D504 in the C-Box has its own source of 230 Vac
through the power slip rings. It comes from the PDS F9 or F11 breaker and K4 relay, through the LEFT Pedestal
line filter Z306 through the power slip rings.
The UFC Detector Heater can be supplied in one of three ways, depending on which was chosen by the
installation team:
1. PDS X257, breaker F9, signal L3_DHFG, through W1cable #1622476. (*)
2. PDS X257, breaker F9, signal L3_DHFG, through W62 cable #1622492. (*)
3. PDS X252, breaker F11, signal L3_CONT, through W1cable #3117848.
Note (*) In some of the earlier model Plus-4’s, the 230 Vac PDS F9 breaker supply to the dehumidifier was
not shut off when the CT was turned off; it stayed on all the time. When the PDS rev number 4 came
out, the K3 pins 5 and 6 (normally open contacts) were set inline to the F9 supply to the gantry. Thus,
when the CT is turned off (SYS ON and EVA ON not pressed), the dehumidifier is also off.
The XC-SIDE boards connect the X-ray System to the X-ray Control Boards (D572, D573, D574). The XC-SIDE_1
is on the left side of the XC Box. The XC-SIDE_2 is on the right. Both plug into the XC Box backplane D570 which
distributes control signals, the CAN bus, Stop Report Loop, and power supply voltages between the XRS boards.
The Power Slip rings also provide the RAC Box the DC anode starter signals from the DCC.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Patient Communication (Audio)


Communication between the operator and the patient is made possible by intercom communication, digitally
recorded instructions for repetitive messages, and a lamp on the gantry to let patients know when they should hold
their breath. There are two microphones and one speaker at the gantry. There are a microphone, speaker, an API
button for automatic messages, a CALL PAT and a HEAR PAT button at the console.
A board called Gantry Audio D341 is mounted on the inside of the rear gantry cone. It receives its commands and
24 V power through the Control Data Slip Rings from the GPC_MCB.
The respiratory Lamp H301 receives its 12 V power on command from the GPC_MCB.
ON means X-ray ON - Remain Still
Blinking means Hold Breath
Off means Relax
A board called API D77 for Automated Patient Instruction is located
inside the CIB of the SMI in the Imaging cabinet (IMS).

You reach the software to adjust volume and record messages


by selecting Scan Setup then API .

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Rotate
The RTC MCB is the Rotating and Tilt Controller. It is located in the left pedestal on the same main board (D301)
with the MCU. It communicates with the frequency converters for rotation and tilt.
The RTC controls rotation by detecting the revolution speed and tube position by light barrier pulses from the
rotating slot ring and controlling the LUST converter.
The LUST converter receives 3 phase line voltage from the gantry PSS which got it from the IMS PDS. The
converter does not regulate the speed. It generates output according to its programmed parameters. When a fixed
azimuth is required such as for TOPO, the converter supplies a constant voltage to hold the gantry . The motor is
held by the magnetic attraction. This requires that the gantry is balanced.
There are 1440 Angular Pulses (AP0) from the LPS D302 and one Index AP for each rotation.
The rotate motor has no mechanical brake. Rotate Brake E222 uses damping resistors to slow and stop rotation.
It is activated when Safety switch S301 on the lower left front is activated.
The PSS Solid State Relays D321, D322, D323 remove 3 phase AC from the Rotate Frequency Converter
whenever the system is in a STOP condition. Refer to System Control.
The GPC MCB monitors table position, gantry tilt, gantry door switches, power levels, temperature, humidity and
lasers and will alert the MCU MCB whenever an unsafe condition arises so that it can stop gantry rotation.
The MCU_MCB will send a STOP signal to tfhe Rotate Converter and its PSS power relays whenever a STOP
condition occurs.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Gantry Tilt
The RTC (Rotating and Tilt Controller) board in the left pedestal controls gantry tilt. When a tilt request arrives, the
RTC sends a request to the Tilt Frequency Converter E302, also located in the left pedestal. The Tilt FC creates
three phase voltage and sends it to the Tilt Motor And Spindle located in the right pedestal. The RTC board uses
the B301 tilt sensor located in the left pedestal to monitor the angle of the gantry.
Gantry tilt can be requested through the pushbuttons on the front of the gantry, the pushbutton on the GPC board in
right pedestal, or the console keyboard “MOVE” button through software control; the MOVE button will not work in
ICT mode, i.e.: table support retracted.
AC mains supply voltage for the tilt freq. converter is only active if the CT is reset and not in a stopped condition.
SAFETY: To lock down gantry tilt, you must insert a tilt locking pin into one of the round slots on the upper tilt
spindle assembly arm. The locking pin is normally removed after installation and remains in the right pedestal for
just such an occasion.
The GPC monitors table position, gantry tilt, gantry door switches, power levels, temperature, humidity and lasers
and will alert the MCU MCB whenever an unsafe condition arises so that it can stop gantry tilt.
Unless the scanner is in Service Mode, it automatically runs a Collision Check by querying the:
- PTH for horizontal table top and top support movement,
- PTV for vertical table movement,
- RTC for the gantry tilting,
- GPC for manual movement with the key panels.
Each of these function controllers performs its specific movement only within its allowed range. Additionally, the
PTH monitors vertical, the PTV monitors horizontal and the MCU monitors tilt activity.
The MCU will send a STOP signal to the Tilt Converter and its PSS power relay whenever a STOP condition
occurs.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Table Horizontal
Horizontal motion is controlled by the D701 Patient Table Horizontal board located under the Table Top. The table
has two horizontal drives. The Table Top is the cradle that holds the patient and moves the most. The Top
Support is the support under the Table Top. Both parts, the Table Top and Top Support can be moved
independently. Each has its own motor, drive belt and position pot for defining the exact horizontal position of the
table. Both horizontal motors are driven by the PTH_MCB that also monitors the current position with the use of
the horizontal encoders and the HTP (horizontal table pulses) signal. It also monitors the 24 Vdc from G700.
The Table Top has two mechanical brakes (Y711, Y712). One brake is located next to the Table Top motor. The
other one is on the opposite side, at the gantry end of the toothed belt drive. The brakes are activated by the
function controller with relay K2 and a 24V DC supply.
The Table Top has a clutch (Y713) that separates the Table Top Motor from the mechanical drive assembly. The
clutch is applied by the PTH controller with relay K6 and a 24V DC supply.
The Top Support movement is reported by the increment encoder B710 fixed to the Top Support motor axis. The
proximity switch U710 is activated, when the top support switch reaches the rear end. Potentiometer R710 is used
to roughly determine the actual position of the top support.
The brake Y710 stops the Top Support motor drive and holds it in position. The brake is activated by the PTH
controller with relay K3 and a 24V DC supply. The support safety switch plate with S711a and S711b at the foot of
the table stops horizontal movement should the top support hit an obstacle while moving outwards.
Horizontal Specs
- Horizontal travel range of the Table Top is 166 cm (65 in)
- Horizontal travel range of the Top Support is 35 cm (14 in)
- Continuous table feed for the SPIRAL MXP scan mode is 0.5 to 20 mm/rev
- Fastest travel speed is 150 mm/sec.
- Positioning accuracy is ± 0.5 mm
- Nominal table load is 200 kg (440 lb)
- When in ICT (interventional) mode, horizontal movement is out of the gantry rather than into

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Table Vertical
Vertical motion is controlled by the D702 Patient Table Vertical board (mounted at table bottom rear). The D702
carries a D333 MCB board. The D702 controls the frequency controller and motor (M702), brakes (Y702), and
receives vertical position from the encoder (B702) and switches (S704, S701-703, U702). The D702 board also
monitors the 24 Vdc power coming from the G700 PS for the frequency converter and D703 relay.
In the earliest Plus-4’s the D702 Patient Table Vertical board was located under the Table Top with the D701.
The vertical movement is achieved by rotating the ball bearing screw or spindle to open or close the table scissors.
The spindle is driven by a 3-phase AC motor. Its supply is generated by a frequency converter. The vertical motor
is controlled by the PTV_MCB using the PTV frequency converter. This converter is physically the same as the tilt
one. There is a thermal switch to protect the motor against overheating.
The spindle is held in position by a spindle brake. A tow-rope potentiometer with signal conditioner records the
absolute table height. The proximity release switch defines the reference position for adjustment. Another switch
reports if an obstacle underneath the table prevents the scissors from lowering the table.
The E702 frequency converter (FC) takes single phase 230 Vac and converts it to three phase VAC to drive the
M702 lift motor. It requires a 230 Vac supply for drive power, a 12 Vdc supply for the electronics, and positioning
control data. The 230 Vac is switched on and off via the D703 solid state relay which is only on when there are no
errors present and the CT is reset. The 12 Vdc comes from the G700 power supply through the D702 board; it is
not fused. The control data comes from the D702 board as a serial data stream.
The boundaries of table movement are determined by the mechanical limits of the PHS. They are a function of the
gantry angle, table height and horizontal position. These aspects define the Collision Check for which the scanner
automatically tests.
Vertical range is 48 cm to 102 cm
Lifting speed is 10 or 20 mm/sec.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Table Range
Table Height Gantry Tilt Table Feed-In
95 to 106 +1 to +30 Not allowed
95 to 106 0 to - 30 Allowed according to combo of height vs. tilt
107 to 117 +1 to +30 Allowed according to combo of height vs. tilt
107 to 117 0 to - 30 Unlimited
118 to 125 Unlimited Unlimited
126 to 155 0 to +30 Unlimited
126 to 155 0 to - 30 Allowed according to combo of height vs. tilt
156 to 255 0 Unlimited
256 + 0 Not allowed
Note A table height of 95 means the table has been fully raised.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Table Power
S1 in the PDS enables table movement using the Table Service Switches when the gantry is powered off by
SYS_OFF, EVA_ON or an over temperature condition. K4 in the PDS opens when the gantry temperature exceeds
42°C. This stops power from reaching the gantry and therefore table.
The Stop Relay removes the frequency converter power when a STOP condition arises.
The plate between Gantry and PHS (Patient Handling System) serves as a foot switch to immediately stop table
and gantry movement and to mechanically release the table top for free manual movement.
Proximity switch U702 is activated when the table position is above the height of 155 mm (on the keypad display).
This allows horizontal movement with a tilted Gantry as long as the scanner is NOT in ICT (interventional) mode.
The table is supplied 230 Vac for the G700 DC power supply via the F16 breaker in the PDS. The table lift motor
has its own 230 Vac supply from the F15 breaker in the PDS. The K4 relay in the PDS, which is normally on if no
temperature fault is detected in the gantry, normally supplies power to the F15 and F16 breakers. If the S1 switch
in the PDS is turned on, the K4 relay is bypassed and 230vac is forced to the table via the F15 & F16 breakers.
Even if the whole CT is turned off at the console, the S1 PDS switch will still apply power to the table.
The G700 DC power supply is located in the center bottom of the table and supplies all DC power to all the table
components.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Generator Power
MAINS INPUT POWER and NS RELAY (Right Side)
AC power for the generator is connected through the F1, F2, and F3 mains fuses which are located behind a metal
box cover. The mains input power for the generator usually comes from a dedicated breaker panel found near to
the cabinets. After the fuses, the mains goes through the NS Relay before going into the DCC Bridge.
The NS Relay is general safety relay that is controlled by the K2 relay on the D670 Relay Board, which is in turn
controlled by the DCC-CON D650 board. The NS relay connects the mains line input to the DCC Bridge rectifier.
The NS is monitored to make sure it activates and deactivates. The 24 Vdc needed to activate the NS relay comes
from the PDS.
It needs to be pointed out that the generator does not use the mains neutral line input, except in the line filters at
the input to the bridge. It does not use the neutral as neutral.
RELAY BOARD D670, XRAY WARNING LAMP, and DOOR SWITCH
The Xray On Warning lamp power comes from the X3 connector on the Relay Board. If the system has been
configured not to make X-rays when the CT door is open, the connections for the door switch will come to the X1
connector on this board. Most sites simply short this connector out at the X1 connector.
Refer to Theory about Relays on Relay Board
Refer to Theory about Generator Fuses

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Relays on D670 Relay Board


K1 - Gantry room door monitoring (open or closed).
Powered from PDS 24 Vdc power supply. Energizes when the DOOR_IN signal contacts close indicating that the
door to the gantry examination room is closed. When the contacts close they complete the “DOOR” signal to the
HV_CON D640 boards MCB to indicate that the door is closed. *Note: Normally this relay is configured so that it
stays on all the time.
K2 – Small signal relay that brings in the heavy mains AC supply relay to the DCC section.
Powered from PDS 24 Vdc power supply. Energizes when the DCC_CON MCB board sets the “NS_Relay” signal.
When the contacts close they bring in the heavy current NS relay which in turn connects the mains AC to the cap
bank charging system.
K3 - Disallows trigger voltage to the H.V. Inverter if the CT emergency stops is ON or is not reset.
Powered from the StopPosGen and StopNegGen signals coming from the MCU_RTC D301 board in the gantry left
pedestal. Energizes when the gantry left pedestal MCU_RTC D301 board sets the StopPosGen and StopNegGen
signals. When the contacts close they complete the 24 Vdc power supply path from the generators’s 24 Vdc supply
to the high voltage inverter’s triggering circuit; Thus, allowing high voltage to be created.
K4 - Turns on the “Xrays On” warning lamp in the gantry room.
Powered from the generator’s internal 24 Vdc supply. (24V_IGN) Energizes when the monitoring circuit detects
high voltage greater than 20 Kv is on. When the contacts close they completes the path for the examination room
“Xrays On!” lamp.
K5 - Enables the H.V. inverter to trigger and make high voltage.
Powered from PDS 24 Vdc power supply. Energizes when the D650’s MCB D333 board sets the “W1_Enable”
signal. When the contacts close they enable the generator’s 24 Vdc supply to feed the high voltage inverter’s (W1)
triggering circuit.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Generator Fuses
F1, F2, F3 / 63 Amp Slow Blow. Found under the metal box cover on the right. Used as the main input line fuses.
F4, F5, F6 / 2 Amp Fast Blow. Three short and fat bolt like fuses located near the middle, all in a row. Used to
sample the sine waves of the mains input voltage to trigger and synchronize the timing of the bridge rectifier DCC
circuit.
F8, F9 / 30 Amp Fast Blow. Two smaller bolt like fuses on the left side. Used for the UDC Anode Rotation Starter
voltage that goes through the slip ring to the RAC Box.
F7 / 2 Amp Fast Blow. Located between F4-6 and F8-9. Used for fan supply. In generators with a serial number
greater than 1513, this fuse is not present.
PDS F10 / 3 Amp. Found in the PDS. Supplies the GEN E606 Power Supply and the E605 Heat Exchanger

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

HV Generation
The NS Relay guards the 3 phase AC line voltage in and connects the three line phases to D651, the Cap Bank. It
requires 24V from the PDS, Power Distribution System. Refer to detailed NS Relay Theory.
The DC Circuit (DCC D650) of the generator provides power to the Main Inverter in the generator and Rotating
Anode Circuit in the gantry. The DCC converts AC to DC voltage. The DCC_MCB monitors its status. The DCC
uses a 6-pulse converter called the Bridge D651 to charge up the Capacitor Bank D652, to a set point voltage
±UDC (P/N_UDC_Starter). The set point voltage depends on the scan parameters for voltage and current and
upon the anode frequency. Its DC Control board (D650) controls ±15 VDC of its ignition stages, the thyristor
ignition pulses to Bridge, NS relay functions, Capacitor discharge, Acquisition of ±UDC, communication to the
Gantry Stationary (MCU) and H. V. Circuit E603. Refer to detailed DCC Theory
The High Voltage Circuit (HVC D640) of the generator supplies KV_POS and KV_NEG to the tube through HV
cables and the gantry High Voltage Slip Rings, HV_SLR. The generator also supplies the ground, HV_SHIELD, for
the tube and damping resistors. The damping resistors limit tube current when the tube arcs. The HV Circuit
consists of the Main Inverter and the HV Tank.
The HVC monitors and controls HV production. It monitors the scan room door, gantry HV status, DCC output,
tube voltage and current generation of the HV Tank E604, and the HV Start Trigger D641 of the Main Inverter E603.
The MCB on the HVC interfaces with the MCU_MCB for HV production. Refer to detailed HVC Theory.
HV Control Signals
DOSEOK is set by the FIL_CON if radiation is switched on and no error is detected. The DMS uses it as a start
signal of data acquisition with radiation.
EVENREA is set by the DMS ACU_2 with each even reading number. It is used by the DELPHI to sync focus
deflection with data acquisition.
PREXRAYOFF is set by the DMS ACU_2, Data Measurement System 750 us before radiation is switched off. The
FIL_CON uses it to switch over from the dose rate control to the filament control mode at the end of a scan.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Direct Current Circuit


The DCC BRIDGE RECTIFIER converts three phase AC voltage into DC to charge the Capacitor Bank. The three
phase bridge rectifier is designed to select only a certain portion of the incoming sine waves for use. The sine
waves of all three phases are sampled on the D650 DCC Con board to create synchronization pulses to trigger the
bridge with. For example, if the bank needed to be charge to 450 Vdc (max), then the bridge would trigger the
SCR’s to turn on early in the sine wave’s cycle so that it could use a major portion of the sine wave to charge with .
If the bank were only to be charged to 100 Vdc (min) then the bridge would only trigger on the very last portion of
the sine wave.
The D650 DCC_CON BOARD handles all aspects of sampling, triggering, and controlling the DCC Bridge and Cap
Bank. The D650 board has a D333 MCB board which means it communicates through the CAN bus and sits on the
StopReport loop. It receives the S_INV signal (Start Inverter) from the D640 HV_CON board as a signal to charge
the cap bank. It responds with the signal UDC_OK to let the HV_CON board know when the cap bank is charged
and ready for the main inverter to turn on. It also controls the mains NS relay and discharging of the DCC.
There are two LEDs on the D650 that show when the bridge is being charged (Fire Relay) and when the cap bank
is discharging (Discharge). If both LED’s are ON at the same time then the K1 discharging relay is bad.
The D650 also monitors the DCC temperature through the external NTC R1 sensor and it supplies +24 Vdc to the
main inverter ignition stages.
The DCC CAP BANK provides a stabilized source of DC voltage, 100 to 450 Vdc, to the main inverter and the
anode starter circuit. It consists of twenty 2 mF capacitors for a total of 0.01 Farad of capacitance. The cap bank
gets charged between 100 and 450 Vdc, depending on the selected mode and anode starter requirements. D650
DCC Con board controls the charge through the ignition stages of the DCC Bridge rectifier circuit.
The Cap Bank also supplies the anode rotation starter voltage through the slip rings to the RAC_Box. The
voltage is fused through the F8 and F9 fuses, which are located in the lower section of the generator cabinet.
Refer to HVC Theory.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

High Voltage Control


The Inverter takes the stabilized DC voltage from the cap bank and converts it into a chopped DC / AC waveform
to feed the primary of the high tension tank. The inverter consists of a four-way bridge of SCR’s that are triggered
by the D641 HV Trig board, which in turn is master controlled by the D333 MCB on the D640 HV Con board. The
bridge of SCR’s are supplied DC voltage from the DCC cap bank. In the center of the bridge of SCR’s is the
primary of the high voltage tank.
If one of the SCR’s does not turn off during high frequency triggering, a direct short occurs from the cap banks
negative side to the positive. This can be disastrous and permanently damage capacitors, wiring, or SCR’s. To
alleviate this there is a quick response monitoring circuit built into the inverter that watches for this condition and
reports it to the D641 and D640 as “Short_Inv”.
On the wires coming out of the inverter going to the primary of the tank there is a small transformer configured as
a mirroring or reflecting transformer. Whatever waveform travels through its primary is reflected on its secondary,
which is connected to the IS+ and IS- testpoints on the D640 board. The purpose of this is to provide the service
engineer a way to watch the output of the inverter going to the tank.
Finally, the inverter also has a temperature monitoring sensor mounted in it that is read by the D640 HV Con board.
The D641 HV TRIG BOARD triggers the Inverter. It requires the P_24V_IGN signal / supply , the start signal
(S_INV) and a triggering frequency (2*F inv) from the D640 HV Con board.
The P_24V_IGN supply is a type of safety interlock scheme. The voltage does not appear until exposure is
requested. If there are any problems in the system, the 24 Vdc is turned off which prevents inverter triggers and
therefore high voltage. The start signal (S_INV) which also turns the inverter on will only be present if numerous
safety interlock conditions are not active.
Refer to High Voltage Acquisition and Tank Theory

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

High Voltage Acquisition and Tank


The High Voltage Tank receives the chopped DC / AC signal from the inverter, steps it up, rectifies it, and
stabilized it before sending it on to the tube. The tank has two separate sections, one for the positive side and one
for the negative; they work independently.
The HV TANK MONITORING BOARD D642 mounted on the top of the tank is the HV Acquisition board. This
board is connected directly into the inner workings of the tank via some terminals that the board mounts onto. It
uses 15 volts from the E606 power supply for its internal logic.
Via a resistive ladder tree the positive and negative high voltage outputs of the tank are monitored, acquired,
reported to the D640 HV Con board as the signals +UT act & -UT act. In the D640 they are summed to create the
signal UT act which can is sampled and viewed there.
Tube current is acquired here also. The common pathway between the positive and negative portions of the tank
meets through a low value resistor on this board. The total current that flows through the tube flows through this
resistor also. Thus, the voltage drop across this resistor represents the total tube current.
This signal is called IT act.
There are also two large U type jumpers on the D642 board that are in line to the positive and negative sides of the
transformer. The jumpers can be pulled out and a true RMS meter can be inserted here to directly monitor the
tanks’ positive and negative side tube current.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

HOW XRAYS START IN THE GENERATOR


The start of X-rays begins in the ACU_2 Board in the DMS Gantry Rotation section. The ACU_2 board sets the
“XC” signal which travels through the CTL_DAT_RS slip rings and through the MCU board in Gantry Stationary
before entering the D640 board in the generator.
When the “XC” signal becomes set, the D640 sets the “SINV” signal to the DCC to tell it to charge the cap bank. If
at this time the internal 24 Vdc power is not within tolerance or if the “Door” signal is not set, the D640 will not send
the “SINV” signal.
When the cap bank is charged the DCC sends back the “UDC_OK” signal, which tells the D640, it can start
triggering the inverter and creating high voltage.
The D640 then becomes responsible to monitor the high voltage and tube current coming out of the tube and
regulate it through the inverter triggering frequency. During this time the D640 is also monitoring for over
temperature of the inverter and tank, and it is monitoring the “ShortInv” signal to make sure the inverter does not
short out.
When the D640 senses that the tank output is above 20 kV, it sets the “XraGen” signal going to the gantry
stationary MCU board. This is a signal to the rest of the CT to indicate that high voltage is on. The D640 also sets
the “Xray” signal going to the D670 board which turns on the “XraysOn” lamp and starts to increment the scan
counter mounted on the D670 board second by second.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

X-ray Generation
The X-ray Tube is a Siemens DURA 502 MC high-performance CT tube. Its anode heat storage capacity is 5.3
MHU. It has two focal spot sizes: IEC 336/93 0.8 x 1.1 and 0.6 x 0.6. It has a flying focal spot for multifan op.
The Generator delivers High Voltage and Anode Starter power to the gantry.
High Voltage must pass through the HV Slip Rings and then the Positive and Negative Damping resistors
before it enters the tube. The only purpose of the damping resistors is to limit current in case of tube arcs.
The Positive Damping Resistor has four resistors in line from the input to the output, for a total of 1360 ohm
resistance.
The Negative Damping Resistor also has the same four resistors, but it also has a filament isolation input in it.
Before the damping resistors, the negative HV cable only has HV on it. After it travels through the Negative
Damping Resistor, the source for the filaments is added.
Note Although the damping resistors look alike, they are two different assemblies.

Grounding
The tube and damping resistors are electrically isolated from the gantry’s grounding system. They are only
connected to Generator ground through the HV Slip Rings. Tube temperature, pressure, and anode rotation
monitoring circuitry are connected to gantry ground.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Anode Rotation
The Rotating Anode Circuit (RAC E562) accelerates and decelerates the anode of the X-ray tube. The necessary
anode speed depends on the anode’s temperature and the operator selected tube power.
The RAC_CTL D95 board contains the logic that controls and relays status of the rotating anode circuits via the
RAC_MCB to the CAN bus.
The RAC_INV Inverter D93 uses three power stages to generate the three phases (chopped DC) supplied to the
tube anode (stator). A variable DC voltage comes from the Direct Current Circuit (DCC) of the generator. It varies
from 100 to 450 V and arrives through the gantry's Power Slip Rings.
The IGBT_CTL D91 board drives the inverter SCR gate triggers, monitors anode starter voltage and rotation
frequency; it monitors Inverter input voltage. The output of the inverter goes through the primary of the T7 and T8
transformers to reach the anode stator. The current that goes through the primaries of the transformers is reflected
in their secondary windings. This reflected (also called mirrored) current is used on the D91 IGBT_CTL board to
monitor the current going to the tube anode stator windings. It is also monitored to see if it is too high which would
indicate a short in the inverter.
After the anode is boosted, there is a reflected sine wave sampled at D91 to determine rotation frequency which is
highly monitored by the RAC_CTL board.
The RAC_FIL D99 receives the DC supply voltage for the inverter and supplies power to the tube's rotating anode.
The RAC_CTL and the D91 IGBT_CTL plug into the RAC_Backplane D98.
UDC During a Scan Sequence
Before the scan starts, the UDC supply voltage is increased so that the anode can increase at a rate of 20Hz per
second until the desired frequency is reached. The UDC voltage varies slightly during the following scans. At the
end of the scan sequence, the UDC is increased again slightly to facilitate a 2 Hz per second deceleration rate until
the anode is braked to less than 4 Hz.
If the CT goes into a STOP, ABORT, or Stand-by condition, the UDC is set to 100 volts and kept there for an
indefinite time while the anode brakes.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Dose Control (Filament Current)
The tube has two filaments, large and small, mounted in the same cup on the cathode side. The filaments are
controlled by the FIL_CON D572 board. The filaments are sourced through the Negative Damping Resistor.
The FIL_CON (Filament Control or D572) regulates tube filament current which regulates mA and dose rate
during the exposure. The Phi PSD inside the FOC_MON detects signals proportional to the dose to the PHI_AMP
D555 board that buffers them to the DELPHI D573 board. At the DELPHI board the signals are added and sent to
the FIL_CON board where it becomes the “J act” signal.
The tube current is called IT_act and the dose rate is called J_act. They are controlled by the actual filament
current called If_act. Tube current can be monitored on the HV Acquisition Board in the generator.
The FIL_MCB regulates the two FIL_CON modes between filament control and dose rate control. It informs the
ACU_MCB when radiation is ON so that data acquisition can start. It watches the DLP_MCB for when radiation is
no longer detected by the FOC_MON; it watches the ACU_MCB for when data acquisition is almost over.
Filament control mode is present when HV is OFF, and during the first few msec of X-ray and the last 750 µsec of
X-ray. Feedback from filament current regulates the FIL Inverter trigger. The actual current is compared to the
nominal value determined by SYSTEM TUNEUP.
Dose rate mode is present when HV is ON, and after the start of a scan and until 750 µsec before it is turned off.
Feedback from DELPHI focus deflection circuit and its FOC_MON located near the tube regulate the FIL Inverter
trigger. The actual dose is compared to the nominal dose determined by the SYSTEM TUNEUP process.
The Filament Inverter converts 325 VDC to an AC filament current that is supplied to the isolation transformer inside
the Negative Damping resistor. The higher the trigger frequency, the higher the filament current and dose rate.
DOSE OK from the FIL_CON to ACU_2 is set if there is no error and XRAY ON from the DELPHI is still set.
DOSE OK is the final enable signal for the DMS to start data acquisition and transmission to the SMI.
The ZCO_MCB uses the FOC_MON and the PHI_AMP reading coming through the DELPHI to detect and evaluate
the actual dose out of the tube. The Z focus and the filament current depend on the actual dose.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Beam Thickness and Center
Beam thickness and position is adjusted by two tube side (collimator) diaphragms and one detector diaphragm. All
of their motors require a good 24 VDC supply that comes from the DPU.
The Z_CON Board D574 moves both collimator leaves independently and simultaneously to achieve the proper
thickness and Z centering. (see Z focus).
The DELPHI Board D573 controls the detector diaphragm.
Detector Diaphragm
The detector diaphragm blades are opened and closed by its M1 motor. The M1 motor is controlled with 24 Vdc
from the DELPHI board D573. The DELPHI Box receives this voltage from the DPU. The DELPHI board monitors
this voltage. If it falls below 18 volts, it will set the “fuse monitoring” signal (24VnotOK).
If the motor opens or closes the blades too far, there are limit switches that remove the DC voltage to the motor for
that direction but allow the motor to turn in the opposite direction and back off from the switch.
S1 too far open
S2 too far closed
The detector E1 encoder sends its signals (CH0, CH90, Index) to the DELPHI Board.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Beam Focus in Z Direction


The ZCO_MCB on the Z_Control Circuit (ZCO) in the XC Box regulates the in-out or Z focus of the beam. It uses
the Z_MON_2 (D585) to detect the actual beam position in the Z direction. This monitor is located on the right side
of the detector when it is at the bottom of its rotation. Its feedback is used to adjust the two collimator diaphragms.
The ZCO_MCB also compares and uses the FOC_MON and the PHI_AMP radiation intensity reading with the one
coming through the DELPHI to detect and evaluate the actual dose out of the tube. Both the Z focus and the
filament current depend on the actual dose.
ZMON_2
The ZMON_2 (D585), mounted on the detector, provides feedback to the Z_CON board D574 as to exactly where
the position of the fan beam is in the Z direction. The Z_CON board then uses this position information to control
the beam and keep it directly over the center of the detector. There is a Position Sensitive Device (PSD) inside the
Z_MON that creates two signals referred to as Z2_1 and Z2_2 or zmon1 and zmon2 in the error log.
Since scanning protocols cover a broad spectrum of MAS, the ZMON_2 board must be able to monitor very low and
very high MAS signal strengths. It has a “Gain” input line that tells it how to amplify the signal before sending it to
the Z_CON board. It also has a “Test” signal the Z_CON board can access.

There are four elements to align the beam in the Z direction:


1. Collimator physical adjustment
2. ZMON physical adjustment
3. High voltage or tube parameters adjustment
4. ZMON calibration

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Flying Focus
In many X-ray tube systems, the electrons coming off the filament hit the anode in only one spot, the focal spot.
However the Plus-4 X-ray tube system deflects the electrons flying off the filament, like in a CRT, right and left onto
the anode causing the focal spot to shift right and left as viewed from the front of the gantry.
The dual channels of the Integrator boards allow for one reading to be taken when the focal spot is shifted right, and
the other reading to be taken when the focal spot is shifted to the left.
When the tube reaches a position barely before 12 o’clock, the focal spot is shifted to the right, and the detector is
read out into the “A” side of every dual channel integrator. Since the focal spot was shifted to the right, the origin of
the focal spot comes from the perfect 12 o’clock position, although the detector position is barely before the 6
o’clock position. An instant later, when the tube has just barely passed the 12 o’clock position, the focal spot is
shifted to the left and the detector is read out again into the “B” side of every dual channel integrator. Since the
focal spot is shifted left, the origin of the focal spot again originates from a perfect 12 o’clock position, with the
detector now shifted just slightly past the 6 o’clock position.
Since the origin of the X-ray came from the same place twice, the only difference between the two readings was that
the detector shifted half the width of one channel. We have two different views of the same anatomy represented by
“A” and “B” readings. This is how the detector’s 768 elements become 1536 channels of data for the same view.
Also see Beam Focus Phi

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Beam Focus in Phi Direction (Deflection)


To keep the focus fixed despite tube and detector centripetal movement, a magnetic focus deflection is used. The
Phi focal spot moves like a sine function. In addition to the magnetic adjustment, readings from the DAS help to
even out this variance. The odd reading of the DMS, Data Measurement System correlates to the first half of the
deflection cycle; the even reading correlates to the second half.
Near the cathode cup is a deflection coil (Z1) that deflects the electrons coming off the cup toward the anode to
create the flying focus function. The Z1 PHI_COIL deflection coil is controlled by the DELPHI board D573 in the
XC_Box. The Z1 PHI_COIL is connected at the X5 Connector on the outside of the tube, close to the oil pipe
fitting.
The DLP_MCB on the DELPHI Circuit regulates the left-right or Phi focus of the beam. It uses the values
determined during SYSTEM TUNEUP for this scan's parameters to adjust Phi focus. It determines how much
current the deflection coil inside the X-ray tube assembly requires to center the electron beam. The ACU_MCB
triggers the DLP_MCB with the EVENREA signal.
The DLP_MCB uses the FOC_MON and the PHI_AMP hardware to detect and evaluate the actual beam position in
the Phi direction. This monitor is under and behind the D555 inside the collimator.
The ZCO_MCB uses the FOC_MON and the PHI_AMP reading. It also compares its reading with the one coming
through the DELPHI to evaluate the actual dose out of the tube. The Z focus and the filament current depend on it.

(Besides Phi focus, the DELPHI also controls the detector diaphragm and the laser lights.)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
X-ray Detection
When scanner has an IC Detector (E500)
When the scanner has an IC (Ionization Chambers) Detector, the large unit with the C_Box is the Detector HV
Board (D40). It takes 230 Vac from the Trafo and provides a highly filtered and regulated 250 Vdc to the IC
detector to polarize its Xenon gas. This DC voltage is not monitored by the CAN Bus.
The IC detector has 768 gas chambers in one pressurized housing. Each chamber has two high voltage (250 Vdc)
electrodes and a single cathode electrode. When radiation strikes the chamber, its gas ionizes between the
electrodes resulting in current that flows to a specific channel on a specific D501 Integrator board. The integrator
board converts the current to a voltage. The greater the X-ray Quanta entering the chamber, the greater the
amount of ionization, current flow, and converted voltage. The integrator board voltage is sampled and held by an
op amp until it is read by an ADC board in the DMS C-Box.
When scanner has a UFC Detector (E501)
When the scanner has a UFC Detector, the large unit with the C_Box is the Detector Heater Control Board
(D504). It takes 230 Vac directly from the Power Slip Rings to heat and maintain the UFC detector at 33°C ± 2. The
ACU_MCB on ACU_2 monitors this board so its errors appear in the error log. If the detector temperature falls
below 31°C in any of three independent temperature zones, then full power is applied to the appropriate heater pad
of three inside the detector. If the temperature is 31°C to 33°C, then 50% power is applied. While the temperature
is over 33°, the heater pad is off. The Detector Heater Control Board (D504) creates its own 5 and 15 Vdc power
and has one fuse (F1) for heaters.
The UFC (Ultra Fast Ceramic) detector is a solid state detector that contains 768 ceramic elements to detect X-ray
quanta. A drawback to solid state detectors is that their outputs change according to temperature. For this reason,
the detector must be kept at 33°C ± 2 (91°F ± 4). Temperature sensors are monitored by the D504 Heater Control
Board. The D515 board mounted on the detector distributes the power from the Detector Heater Control Board to
the heating pads and passes the sensor signals back.
The UFC detector uses D506 Integrator boards to sample and hold the current from the ceramic elements. The
integrator boards are dual channeled for flying focal spot use.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Data Acquisition
The DMS (Data Measurement System) or DAS (Data Acquisition System) quantifies the intensity of X-ray measured
by the 768 detector elements using 48 integrator boards (D501). Each integrator board has 16 channels. The ADC
boards convert the analog quantities from the integrators to digital ones. The states of these channels are managed
by the ACU boards. ACU_1 sets the timing, monitors the dose and transmits the scan data across the
Measurement Slip Rings. The ACU_2 coordinates System Controls with the DMS. Commands and states transfer
across the Control Data Slip Rings.

Refer to Scan Process for another explanation. Refer to TABGEN for DAS Calibration procedures.
DAS Cooling
The D507 DAS Fan driver board converts +24 Vdc down to +18 Vdc for use by the DAS fans. The DAS fans cool
the 48 Integrator boards located inside the box.
The ACU_1 monitors the DAS temperature sensor. It provides test data too.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Reconstruction
The digitized data from the DMS is delivered from the Measurement Slip Ring Receiver D410 to the Imager
Receiver D96 using fiber optic electronics. These boards and assemblies comprise the SMI-5 imager. Use the
Service program hte to test theSMI.
REC Receiver D96, plugged onto the Data-I/O board receives the serial optical data from the gantry.
I/O RPP or I/O board D32 or D30 collects data sets from Receiver for processing.
MAP-40 Memory And Processor board D55 serves as a data buffer and performs Ring Fix and 3D processing.
There are two D55 MAP-4 boards in the SMI-5. The first (MAP-4 #1) board has one of two flavors of
RAM boards attached to it: D161 M4-Mod Board (256MB RAM) or D162 M4-Mod board (128MB RAM)
AP-D Array Processor system D57 provides preprocessing and convolution.
BP-4 Back Projector boards D83B calculate the tomogram (axial) matrix from preprocessed projections.
IMA-ML Imager boards D70 serve as display devices for HOST information (text, graphics, ROI) and the image.
There is one for each CRT.
Maxicam SUN Camera interface D66 provides hard copy image archival by a digital camera through IMS Pritzel.
EOS Electro-Optical modules convert the electrical RGB signals into optical signals for the monitors.
There is one for each CRT.
SIAM-C System Interface And Memory board D21 links the SMI to the HOST.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory

Video
The graphics processors of all Imagers are always driven and controlled by the SPARC host computer through the
SIAM-C board, which in-turn spreads the GBus to all imagers by the D151 front connector board.
As the Imager board D70 is used in many Siemens scanners with different video standards, it is necessary to order
the required quartz oscillator and firmware whenever the Imager board is replaced.
The EOS (Electro-Optical Sender) module converts the RGB signals from the Imager into optical signals for the
monitors. Fiber optic cable is required. The EOS modules, one for each monitor, are individual units, connected to
the Host backplane between the SMI and SPARC.
The analog display signals for the color image monitor are generated by the Digital-to-Analog Converter. It contains
a color palette LUT’s for the medical and graphics pixels. The color DAC R, G, B issues the electrical Red, Green
and Blue signals. Video synchronization is on the Green channel.
The Composite Synchronization (CSYNC) signal is available for external synchronization at connector X11.
Video Standard for this scanner is 1249 lines, 80 Hz, interlaced.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Theory
Alignment Lights
The laser markers (LIMA) can light the potential scan location on the patient or phantom. One can use the Laser
buttons on a gantry keypads or the service button on the GPC board inside the Right Pedestal. One can make
this lit location the ZERO or reference scan location if the ZERO button is pressed next.
The four internal lightmarkers are low power red lasers controlled by the DLP_MCB on the DELPHI (D573). The
external lightmarker is controlled by the GPC D311. When someone presses the lightmarker button, the Gantry
Panel Control board D311 sets the “Lightmarker_On” signal and transfers the signal over the CAN bus to the
DELPHI’s MCB D333. The DELPHI then energizes its K1 relay that passes +5 Vdc to all four internal
lightmarker lasers.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
System Troubleshooting
Power
Rotating Gantry Power Problem
System Control
System Cooling
Tube Cooling
Table
Audio
Rotate
Tilt
High Voltage Generation
Generator
X-ray Generation
Filament Current
Anode Rotation
Beam Shaping
X-ray Detection
Data Acquisition
Reconstruction
Video
Data Storage
Laser Lights

Troubleshooting by Symptom

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

System Troubleshooting
To troubleshoot the system, look at the error logs. Refer to the System Logbook and Unix logs. Gather as many
clues as you can. Scanning for every kind of image the system can make may give you more information about
what is working or not.
If the scanner won’t boot, watch the display for clues as to where a problem may exist. You may need to know the
step that follows the last one displayed. Refer to Theory about the base, Sun Sparc software.
If you can eliminate power, breakers, fuses, clocks and SCSI problems as causes for a failure to boot, you may
have a bad computer board.
Minimum System to Boot
• Good power levels - No overtemperature conditions preventing power
• Good software - No file corruption
• Good connections for all signals Every SMI slot must have good connection to boot, even empty - use Dummy
• Good system hard drive
• Good Sparc host – UNIX commands needed if application software won’t boot
• Good display board – computer requirement for boot

Go to Troubleshooting By Symptom

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Power
No Power
Do gantry Check WCS
keypads Check F8 & F9 in PDS
Is console display a Check K4 in PDS
Sys On lamp Yes decimal point No
Check breakers in Left Pedestal
lit? light?

No Gantry has
Yes
power

Is UPS Check
Yes
installed? UPS

Not the
problem

Is wall CB Reset
Yes
tripped? breaker

No

Check PDS fuses & relays


Check GEN NS Relay & Relay
Bd K3 & Gen PS

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Rotating Gantry Power Problem


Check the System Logbook for Power problems detected by ACU, RAC, DLP, ZCO, FIL
70xx error code Refer to Error Codes for RAC
80xx error code Refer to Error Codes for FIL
90xx error code Refer to Error Codes for DLP
A0xx error code Refer to Error Codes for ZCO
C0xx error code Refer to Error Codes for ACU

Refer to the Logic Diagram and Theory reached through the icons on this page.
Verify that the D575 is ON? Check D575 S1 and the three fuses on D575
Verify that the D575 has power from left Pedestal: Check F306 in and Z306
Check Power Slip brushes
Verify Trafo SI is lit, check Trafo fuses Check Trafo connections
Check DPU voltages
Check circuit breakers and LEDs on C Box.
Check APU voltages

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

System Control
Reset the system.
Check System… Logbook for CAN, STOP, HDLC, Control Slip Ring errors.
Check the cables, connections and brushes for the CAN, STOP, HDLC, Control Slip Rings.
Check the CYCLE LED for the controller of the function that is failing.
If the errors point to faulty controller, try reloading its firmware.
If you want to test whether the MCB board is bad, move it to another location, load the appropriate software tables
into it using MSI and see if it works its its new location. You cannot do this with the ZCO_MCB.
Check LEDs on PSS PS E303 for presence of 24V
Run Service… Test… CAN May have to Reset System before and after

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

System Cooling
Check System… Logbook for Temperature errors, then refer to appropriate Error Code
Check whether all eight WCS channels and water pressure are in spec.
Water temperature in hoses must be less than 40°C
Site or host water must be less than 20°C
Water pressure in the cooling circuit should be: 2.0 ± 0.2 bar when the WCS is OFF.
Look for leaks in the cooling circuit
If air is in the cooling circuit, drain and refill the hoses
Check PDS fuses F2, F6, F9, F13, F14, F15 and PDS Relays K3 – K6
PDS K3 F4 open when the IMS temperature exceeds 60°C.
PDS K4 F8 open when the gantry temperature exceeds 42°C.
PDS K5 F10 open when the Generator temperature exceeds 50°C.
PDS K6 F13 and F14 enable power to the WCS.
Determine whether all sensors, water valves, fans and exchangers are working; refer to Cooling Logic Diagram
Gantry Heat Exchangers M304 and M305
WCS M1 and (if Power system) M2
IMS Heat Exchanger E103
GEN Heat Exchanger E607 (if Power system)
Check GEN HVC LED TempErr

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Tube Cooling
Temperature of oil near temperature sensor S1 is between 70°°C and 80°°C
• Check pumps and fans in the tube cooling system. Check for vibration. Check Trafo F1
• Oil hose may be kinked.
• Tube load calculator may be corrupt.
• Temperature sensor S1 inside the tube may be defective.
Temperature of oil near temperature switch S2 is 80°°C
• Pump or fan in the tube cooling system may be defective.
• Oil hose may be kinked.
• Tube load calculator may be corrupt.
• Temperature sensor S2 inside the tube may be defective.
Oil pressure in tube measured by pressure switch S3 is more than 400 mbar
• Excess oil in the tube cooling system.
• Expansion membrane is defective or adjusted incorrectly.
• Pressure switch S3 is defective or adjusted incorrectly.
• Temperature sensor S1 and/or temperature switch S2 is defective.
• Oil temperature is too high; refer to error situations 1 and 2.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Table Table
Table
won't raise
won't feed
or lower

Table will
C heck that gantry is not tilted C heck transfer plate
raise but
and feed table all the way out C heck collision switch
not lower

Table still C heck that table crush C heck Logbook then refer to
won't raise switches are not stuck or EPST Error C ode section.
W ant or lower m aladjusted Attem pt PT_H orz cal.
power to
table only
U nless Service m ode is desired,
check that PD S S1 is not O N.
C heck that S703 is not O N .
Activate
C heck table breakers F701-F705.
S1 in PD S
C heck PD S breakers F8, F15, F16.

Activate table S703 and Table still


S701 and S702 should won't raise
drive table vertically or lower

C heck Stop R elay D 703.


C heck T able PS G 700.
Test PT_Vert D 702.
If Vertical FC is lit, m otor has power.
C heck Vertical M otor.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting
Patient
Audio Cannot hear nor
cannot
talk to patient
Cannot hear
hear
Adjust volumes with
patient Hold CALL button down
API. Can you hear
No while talking. Can
Is HEAR PAT recorded message at
patient hear?
button ON? console?
Replace
Can you hear
API D77 or
now? Yes No
CIB2 Bd

No
Check Gantry Adjust volume with API. Replace
Audio Bd D341 Can patient hear Yes Console
Adjust volume with Check 24 V supply recorded message? Mic
API. Can you hear Yes to Audio Bd
recorded message?
No

No Replace both Replace Gantry


Still cannot
Gantry mics speaker
communicate
Check API D77 with patient
Check console You still Patient still cannot
power cannot hear
Check console hear patient
microphone Replace Audio Bd Replace API D77 SMI-5
Check fiber
optic cable
Check API
D77

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Rotate
Refer to Troubleshooting Tree
Verify the gantry safety switch S301 and door switches S304 and S305 are closed.
Verify the Table Top has not failed its Collision Check or activated its release switches. If the interference mode is
activated, the couch will be free-floating and the gantry displays will probably be flashing. Also, positive tilt and the
upward motion of the couch will be disabled. To correct, move couch top all the way out and all the way down. The
displays should now be in a normal state.
Check PDS fuse 8. Disable and LOTO the wallbox before checking these fuses. They are normally energized!!!
Check F301, D321, 322, D323 in the gantry left pedestal. Check Line Filter Z301. Check PS 303.
Check LEDs on RTC. Check RTC for STOP condition. Verify RTC is not in Service mode. AP pulses should light
when appropriate.
Verify RTC is supplying 12 V to the LPS.
Check LEDs on LPS_CON
Check Rotate Frequency Converter
Run Service Tests:
0625 Test rotate FC interface
0626 Test rotate speed
0627 Test Angular Pulses

Refer to Error Codes for RTC


Gantry Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Rotate Troubleshooting Tree


Gantry doesn't
rotate

Can rotate
after Power Are Breakers in
Reset? Can Rotate in Gantry Left
Does gantry
Service Mode Pedestal: F301,
try to rotate No No
from RTC in F311, F312, F314,
No then stops?
Left Pedestal? D321-D323
closed?
Yes
Are S301, Yes
S304, S305 Yes
closed? Check AP board and ring
for debris or damage Reflash RTC
MCB; replace Reprogram
if still failing Frequency
Yes Converter
Yes
Can now
Is the STOP rotate?
circuit
working?
No

Check K1 - K3
Check
Windings

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Tilt
Refer to Troubleshooting Tree
If the gantry does not respond to the Tilt buttons on the gantry, verify that the ICT (interventional) scan mode has
not been unintentionally activated at the console.
Verify the gantry safety switch S301 and door switches S304 and S305 are closed.
Verify the Table Top has not failed its Collision Check or activated its release switches. If the interference mode is
activated, the couch will be free-floating and the gantry displays will probably be flashing. Also, positive tilt and the
upward motion of the couch will be disabled. To correct, move couch top all the way out and all the way down. The
displays should now be in a normal state.
Check PDS fuse 8. Disable and LOTO the wallbox before checking these fuses. They are normally energized!!!
Check F302 and D324 in the gantry left pedestal. Check Line Filter Z301. Check PS 303.
Check LEDs on RTC. Check RTC for STOP condition. Verify RTC is not in Service mode. AP pulses should light
when appropriate.
Check Tilt Frequency Converter display, reprogram the FC.
Test the tilt function with Service… Test… GanStat RTC FC Interface Tilt and Tilt Test.
Run Service Tests from RTC or GPC Keytest:
0628 Test tilt FC interface
0629 Test tilt function

Refer to Error Codes for RTC


Gantry Power

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Tilt Troubleshooting Tree


Cannot tilt Check Breakers
from console Does Tilt
FC have No in Gantry Left
Vac? Pedestal: F302,
Can Tilt Is scanner Toggle ICT F313, D324
from Gantry Yes in ICT Yes button on
Keypads? mode? console Yes

Reprogram
No Frequency
Converter

Are Table Can tilt


Height and Raise table
too low and feed all from
Feed in console?
Range? the way out

No
Yes

Replace
- Ck Crash Plate Frequency
Can Tilt
- Reflash RTC MCB Converter
from RTC in
Yes - Swap MCB with another MCB
Left
Pedestal? - Replace GPC Can tilt Replace Tilt
- Replace RTC from No Motor Spindle
console? Assembly
No

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

High Voltage Generation


Run: Scan Setup… Checkup Warmup Go to: Generator Troubleshooting Tree
Arcing
1) Run HVC01 tests. If this diagnostic passes, check for other causes such as dose regulation, anode
problems.
If this diagnostic fails, proceed to step 2.
2) Install dummy plugs into the H1 tank in the generator and re-run HVCO1 tests.
This step tests only the generator. If this tests fails, run DCC tests to further isolate
individual components of the generator. If this step passes, proceed to next step.
3) Install muffs into damping resistors and re-run HVC01 tests. This test removes the tube from the circuit. If
this test passes, the probable cause for errors is the tube.
If this test fails, proceed to next step.
4) Bypass the slip rings by running the rear HV cables directly into the damping resistors. If this test passes,
the error is internal to the slip rings or internal HV cables. If this fails, the possible cause could be the
damping resistors.
Check System Logbook
50xx error code Refer to Error Codes for HVC
60xx error code Refer to Error Codes for DCC
70xx error code Refer to Error Codes for RAC
80xx error code Refer to Error Codes for FIL
90xx error code Refer to Error Codes for DLP
A0xx error code Refer to Error Codes for ZCO

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Generator Troubleshooting Tree

DCC errors HVC errors


(60xx) in System (50xx) in System
Logbook Logbook

Does Cap Bank Does Cap Bank Are HVC Refer to


charge before Yes discharge after Yes waveforms stable? Yes Filament
exposure? Scope exposure? Scope UTact and Current TS
UDCact UT nom

No No No

Missing phase? Discharge Are HV


Blown Mains fuse? Resistor(s) Is ISact
Acquisition UT
Tripped wall breaker? OPEN Yes waveform
waveforms
Blown Cap? good?
balanced?
Shorted Full Wave Rectifier?

No

HV Tank bad No

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

X-ray Generation
Go to: Rotating Anode Control Troubleshooting Tree
Filament Current Troubleshooting Tree

Refer to RAC LEDs, testpoints and switches


Refer to FIL LEDs and testpoints

Check System Logbook


70xx error code Refer to Error Codes for RAC
80xx error code Refer to Error Codes for FIL

Refer to Theory:
HV Generation
X-ray Generation
Rotating Anode Control
Filament Current Control

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Filament Current Troubleshooting Tree


Problem not in
C k LO G Run G EN
G etter
for H V C urrent too high Fixed Q u ality
tu be
errors T ests Insert M uffs
into
Passed D amping
C urrent too low C urrent still too high R esistors,
Passed then run
Insert H VC 01 test
R un C h eck D ummy
Failed R un
FIL01 test FIL_C O N Plugs into
H VC 01 Failed
H V Tank,
test
Passed then run Failed
H VC 01 test
Focal Spot Passed
R un Size switch
Failed Failed X-ray
FIL02 test over
problem Tube
R un D C C Bypass
Passed
test D amping Slip R ings,
R esistor Failed then run
D ose H VC 01
R un
Failed C ontrol test
FIL03 test
Problem

Slip R ing or Passed


internal H V
cable Problem

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Anode Rotation
Anode too
slow Run Service… Test… Platform

Open
gantry
front

Can you hear


Is UDC starter
anode spin up Does START LED Go to
No No signal good from No
when you perform light on the gantry GEN TS
DCC ?
Reset/Init? RAC box?

Yes Yes Yes

Probable
Press EVA Probable
bad Power
ON bad RAC
Slip Ring
brush

Does anode spin No


for at least 20
minutes?
Replace X-ray Tube -
Yes bad bearings

Good

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Beam Shaping
Collimation occurs before (tube diaphragm) or after (detector diaphragm) the beam passes through the patient.
Problems related to slice collimation, Z focus and phi focus would most likely manifest as poor image quality.
Look in the System Logbook for Errors related to these functions. Then refer to the appropriate EPST Error Code
table based on the controller number for help with a possible solution. This number is illustrated on the System
Control Logic Diagram and on the Error Code cover page.
A0xx error code Refer to Error Codes for ZCO
90xx error code Refer to Error Codes for DLP

Perform Service… Test… Phi


Perform Quality Test which checks slice thickness
Refer to Z_CON LEDs, testpoints and switches
Refer to DELPHI LEDs, testpoints and switches
Check FOCACT and FOCREF on DELPHI

Refer to Theory:
Beam Thickness and Centering
Flying Focus also known as Beam Focus Phi
Beam Focus Z

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

X-ray Detection
Check Detector Pressure Gauge
If UFC Detector, if the Power LED on the D504 Heater Board is not ON, check PDS F11 and F1 on the Heater.
IC (Xenon) Detector
The Detector HV Board (D40) 250 Vdc to the IC detector is not monitored by the System Control CAN bus so it
makes no error log entries. When it fails, the images resemble those that occur when the tube arcs.
The pressure of the Xenon gas must be monitored at the pressure gauge to make sure the pressure stays between
20.0 and 25.0 bar (1.0 bar = 14.5 psi). Detector temperature must be within normal operating range when you
read the pressure gauge because temperature will affect pressure. This pressure is not monitored by the system
so it must be regularly checking during PM’s.
If Xenon needs to be added, the GEMS Xenon refill station (GE Part #46-195710G1) can be used by removing the
last coupling off the end of the flexible hose and disregarding step 1 of the refill kits instructions section “3.2
Charging the Detector”.
When ordering Xenon, make sure the replacement gas has a quality of 4.0, H20 is 5 ppm, and CnHm is 1 ppm. It
is probable that the Research Grade (100ml, 450psi, UN2036) Xenon gas that GEMS uses to refill their detectors
(GE Part #219531) will meet this requirement, but be aware that getting this gas requires a four week lead time!
Note There is also an overpressure pop off relief valve mounted on the front of the detector. Be careful
during recharging. If the detector is overcharged the valve is designed to pop off and could cause harm
or injury.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Data Acquisition
Run Test Pattern located under Scan Setup… Checkup… Quicktest
Check blue fiber cable that runs from C Box to IMS
Check DMS brushes
Use icons below to review Logic Diagram or Theory
Refer to Error Codes for ACU
Check gantry APU
Refer to Rotating Gantry Power Distribution Diagram
Use the Service… Test… Ring to help determine which Integrator board or detector element may be bad.
Use Service… Test… DMS Data Offsets Good? Data bad only when rotation is present?
Use SMI Test to check the Receiver Board (smi096)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Reconstruction
Run Test Pattern located under Scan Setup… Checkup…
Change to Service Mode and run Service… Test… HTE SMISYS/QUICK or use hte at the UNIX level.
Remove a suspected board if there is more than one of it. (Imager, Back Projector, MAP) to see if problem goes
away.

Check the LEDs on the SMI boards immediately after a reconstruction problem occurs.
SMI software tests do not find CIB or SIAM problems.
• Refer to CIB Functional Checks
• Refer to SIAM Functional Checks

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Video Troubleshooting Tree


Monitor Check Monitor
No fuse and
Lamp No
display supply to
ON?
Concon

Yes

Check analog
Bad Dual RGB signals
No
display Monitor? at back of
monitor

Yes

Swap optic Swap RGB


Problem Replace IMA
fiber cables at Problem coax lines
Yes Yes D70 board for
back of moved? between EOS moved?
that monitor
monitor boards

No No

Replace
Replace
EOS for that
monitor
monitor

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Data Storage
SCSI Drives
Check Drive Voltages: Pins 1-2: 12V and Pins 4-3: 5V refer to IMS Power Supply
Use the new command: probe-scsi-all to verify whether a SCSI problem exists.
To test a hard drive:
1) Disable all tests with: tests n
2) Select the drive to test by its logical number, like: sd1
3) Display the SCSI Drive Options with: sd1 o
4) Use Filetest if the disk has file structure you want tested; use Rawtest without writing to test basic drive only.

Optical Disks
“Volume not mounted” or Volume improperly mounted” can mean the media is bad.
If message remains with good media, check IMS cooling.
If IMS cabinet is not overheated, the optical drive is probably bad.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Laser Lights

Replace Is the external laser


Are all five laser lights not
Yes DELPHI light working?
working?
D573

No No

Reseat Check connection by


Are all four internal laser
Yes DELPHI activating at gantry Replace
lights not working? Yes
D573 vs console. laser
Is voltage at lamp?

No
No
Check connection
Replace laser
Replace GPC

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting by Symptom
These are known causes but not necessarily the most likely cause. Refer to the appropriate Troubleshooting or
Theory information.
Symptom Possible Cause
ARTIFACT - STREAKS X-RAY TUBE
ARTIFACT - STREAKS SOFTWARE PROBLEM W/VB20A. REFER TO SPEED INFO 101/96 #20
ARTIFACT: LIGHT ARTIFACTS IN SCOUT IMAGE DETECTOR
BUT NOT AXIAL
ARTIFACT: STICKS IN IMAGE SOMETHING INTERFERRING WITH BEAM PATH
ARTIFACT: STICKS IN IMAGE DETECTOR
ARTIFACT: STREAK DEBRIS ON MOTHERBOARD
ARTIFACT: STREAKS ONLY IN SCOUT IMAGE DETECTOR
BUT NOT AXIAL
ARTIFACT: TIRE TRACKS IN SPINE SITE HAD NOT RECEIVED THE PATCH TO 55 HZ WHEN SOFTWARE
UPGRADE WAS DONE
BAD CHANNELS DETECTOR
BAD CHANNELS MOTHERBOARD
BAD IMAGE D501 INT CARD
BAD IMAGE LOOSE DATA CABLES
BAD IMAGE DIRT, TAPE, SOLDER ON COLLIMATOR PORT
BAD NOISE TUBE ARCS
CANNOT LOAD SCAN PARAMETERS GANTRY ROTATION HARDWARE FAULTY OR IN NEED OF CALIBRATION
CNT-E-FOM BRIDGE ERROR BEAM SHAPING; TUBE POSITIONING NOT ALIGNED;
DISPLAY BAD MONITOR, CABLE, D5 OR D55 BD;
ERRORS E5021, E8048, E601B DISK FULL - FILE CORRUPTION
FILM ERROR MESSAGE AFTER PROBLEM ERRORS FROM CAMERA MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED AT TIME OF ERROR
FIXED OR THEY ARE REPEATED LATER
GANTRY WON'T TILT GANTRY TILT SENSOR
GANTRY WON'T POWER UP RESET GANTRY FUSES F306 AND F8 IN THE PDS;

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause
HARDWARE RESET ERRORS TUBE ARCS
HTP ERRORS SILICON SLEEVE ON HV CABLE NOT PLACED PROPERLY; COPPER RING
USED TO TEST SPACE
KEYBOARD NOT WORKING CONSOLE POWER SUPPLY
LIBRARY ERRORS SCAN MODE DOESN'T MATCH WINDOW MODE. RESET WINDOW VALUES
TO MATCH MODES.
MEASUREMENT ABORT - INTERMITTENT RESET VALUE TO DEFAULT AND ADAPTED FILAMENT
MEASUREMENT ABORT ERROR PINCHED FIBER OPTIC CABLE
MEASUREMENT ABORT ERROR D640 AND D333 CORRUPTED TABLE FILES
MEASUREMENT ABORT ERROR WORN DMS SLIP RINGS
MOD CANNOT LOAD CORRUPT DATABASE - RUN RECOVERY
MONITOR AND TABLE NOT WORKING AND SITE COOLING UNIT NEEDS CLEANING
ERROR ON THE CHILLER CABINET
MONITOR BRIGHTNESS IS CHANGING POOR CONNECTIONS - CLEAN FIBER ENDS AND RESEAT SMI OUTPUT BD
MONITOR TUNING BLUE MONITOR
NO BLUE OR NO RED OR NO GREEN VIDEO CABLE
PRINTER CAMERA COMMUNICATION INGRES DATABASE BADLY FRAGMENTED
PROBLEMS
ROTATION ERRORS E301 CONTROLLER
SCAN SEQUENCE STOPPED PREMATURELY CRUSH SWITCHES ON COUCH HAD BEEN INADVERTANTLY HIT CAUSING
PREMATURE SCAN ABORT
SCANNER WON'T OPERATE SYSTEM SOFTWARE CORRUPT - RELOAD
SCANNER WON'T OPERATE HOSPITAL POWER INTERRUPTED - REBOOT SCANNER
SYSTEM LOCKUP - INTERMITTENT POWER SUPPLY
SYSTEM WON'T BOOT SOFTWARE RELOAD NEEDED
SYSTEM WON'T BOOT CPU
SYSTEM WON'T BOOT REMOTE-DIAGSWITCH CORRUPT; CHANGE CONFIG FOR NVRAM TO
ALLOW BOOT UP. RAN CLEANUP DS RECOVERY and SAVED TABLES
SYSTEM WON'T BOOT CIRCUIT BREAKER F5 TRIPPED DUE TO APU PCB

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause
SYSTEM WON'T INITIALIZE REBOOT SYSTEM THEN DELETE IMAGES TO MAKE ROOM ON DISK
SYSTEM WON'T SAVE IMAGES DISK HAD NOT BEEN INITIALIZED PROPERLY AND WAS STILL FULL
SYSTEM WON'T SCAN WORN CONTROL DATA SLIP RING BRUSHES
SYSTEM WON'T SCAN X-RAY TUBE
SYSTEM WON'T SCAN ACU. TUBE ANODE VERY LOUD AND FAILING SOME ROTATION TESTS.
SYSTEM WON'T SCAN LOSS OF FLASH PROM MEMORY. RELOAD MSI
SYSTEM WON'T SCAN DIRTY DATA BRUSHES, HIGH VOLTAGE BRUSHES
SYSTEM WON'T WARM UP OR CALIBRATE D640 FAILURE
TABLE PUSHBUTTONS DON’T WORK SYSTEM SENSES AN EMERGENCY STOP CONDITION;
TUBE COOLING ERRORS WATER SUPPLY AC LINE
WINDOW AND PRESET BUTTONS GO BLANK ADDING REQUESTS TO FULL FILM QUEUE
WINDOW AND PRESET SELECTIONS GO CONSOLE POWER SUPPLY
BLANK

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 How to Use this Tool

How to Use this Tool

About this EPST


Acrobat Reader 4.0 Shortcuts
Adding Personal Notes
Credits
**Links and Navigation
Printing

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 How to Use this Tool

About this EPST


• The Electronic Performance Support Tool or EPST is not intended to replace OEM system documentation. It
also does not cover every problem or situation you may encounter while working on the system. There are
probably many situations in which it would be helpful to refer to OEM system documentation.
• The link icons located at the bottom of every page usually take you to the first page of that section. When a
link icon takes you to a specific reference, the link icon on the destination page will generally take you to the
first page of that section.
• The setup program will create a text file for every page of this tool for your notes. The files are located at:
c:/docs/fc3004/persnote/xxx.txt
Personal Notes cannot work if you move these files; the path is hard-coded into the EPST.
Personal Notes may not work when the computer is networked.
• The content of the EPST was derived from the contributions of the people listed in the Credits.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 How to Use this Tool

Acrobat Reader 4.0 Shortcuts


Acrobat Reader 4.0 can be installed from the CD that holds this EPST. Double-click on the 5 MB executable file.
Here are some shortcut keystrokes that work with the 4.0 version of Acrobat Reader:

[Home] takes you to the first page of the PDF file.


[PageUp] and [PageDown] and [End] work as titled.
[Ctrl+back arrow] takes you Back to the previous display.
[Ctrl+N] enables you to select a specific page number.
[F5] toggles the Bookmark display. Click on a Bookmark to go there.
[F6] toggles the Thumbnail display.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 How to Use this Tool

Adding Personal Notes


To add your personal notes:
1. Click on the Notes icon. Acrobat Reader asks your permission to open another application and file.
2. If you say YES or ALL, Notepad will open a text file. You’ll notice that the filename corresponds
with the page number of the EPST.
3. Type your notes as you’d like. If you open the same file again without saving your first edit, your
changes won’t appear in the second instance.
4. When you’re finished making your notes for that page, save the file. Close Notepad when desired.
5. To access your notes, return to the page of the EPST to which your notes correspond. For example, if
you made notes when you were page 37, return to that page. Click the Notes icon to retrieve your file.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 How to Use this Tool

Links and Navigation


The GE logo in the upper left corner will take you to the first or Home page.
On the bottom of every page after the Home page, you will find an EPST icon bar. Each icon represents an
important Service Category. Click an icon to go to the information type or activity it represents. When appropriate,
that information will be specific to the current topic. Otherwise, it will take you to the Content Page for the selected
Service Category.
You will also find Blue Text throughout the EPST. Click it when it describes information about the topic you want to
see. Use [Ctrl + ← ] or the Adobe Back icon to return to the last viewed page.
In addition to icons and Blue Text, you can use the Acrobat Reader Bookmark feature. To display and undisplay
bookmarks, press [F5] or:
1. Click on the PageWithLeftMargin button on the Adobe toolbar.
This will open a Table of Contents, or Bookmark, window.
2. Click on the title listed in the Bookmark window that describes what you want to view.
3. Click on the Thumbnail tab to see them rather than Bookmarks.
4. To close this LeftMargin window, click on the same Adobe PageWithLeftMargin button.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 How to Use this Tool

Printing
1. Select File… Print
2. Select whether to print all pages, only the current page or a range of pages.
Notice that the default is Print All Pages. Change it if appropriate.
3. Make sure that the Shrink to Fit option is selected when printing a
11” x 17” block diagram to 8.5 x 11 paper. There are none that size in this EPST.
4. To print, click on OK.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Self-paced Training Materials

Self-paced Training Materials

This version of the Siemens Plus 4 EPST does not have a guided tutorial.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Reference Materials

Abbreviations
Bloodborne Pathogens
Calculator
Connectivity Info http://iis.med.ge.com/gcc/
DICOM Definitions
EHS Manual on the Web http://3.231.52.241/ehs/
Electrical Safety
HCS on the Web http://3.7.192.186/hcs/ct/index.html
LOTO - Lock Out Tag Out
Parts Lists
System Block Diagram
Troubleshooting by Symptom
UNIX commands

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Calculator
You can use this EPST as a calculator or hexadecimal converter.

0.00000000

7 8 9 CE C
4 5 6 x /
1 2 3 + -
0 . =

Convert

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Bloodborne Pathogens
Employees must successfully complete Bloodborne Pathogens Training prior to working in any patient care areas.
This training is required annually per OSHA 1910.1030.
• Use universal precautions at all times when working around body fluids. Assume that all body fluids may
contain HIV, HBV and other bloodborne pathogens.
• Always wear proper personal protective equipment for bloodborne pathogen cleanup.
• Do not assist hospital personnel in handling patients or human body fluids unless it is an emergency.
• Follow proper decontamination procedures for clean up of bloodborne pathogens.
• Before leaving the customer site, decontaminate all parts taken or shipped from the worksite. Never ship
parts with visible body fluids on them.
• Remember that Hepatitis B vaccinations are available at no charge to all employees who have
occupational exposure to human blood or body fluids.
• If you believe that you have been exposed to bloodborne pathogens, report the incident to your
immediate manager, Field EHS Program Leader, and the GEMS Occupational Health Nurse.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Electrical Safety
Refer to the EHS Manual.

• Do not perform or direct others to perform electrical work when you are in doubt about the safety procedures
to be followed.
• Only trained, authorized GEMS employees may perform or direct others to perform work involving electrical
equipment. Advise the customer what systems will be affected by your interaction.
• Before connecting any leads, identify voltage magnitudes.
• Do not "float" test equipment off ground to perform test or measurements.
• Disconnect an electrical breaker by facing the breaker box, positioning yourself to the side of the electrical
panel, looking away and throwing the switch.
• Do not agree to perform work involving energized low voltage equipment unless such conditions cannot be
avoided. De-energize equipment when possible.
• When you work with high voltage equipment (>600 VAC , 750 VDC), ensure that a second person who knows
how to shut off the circuit in case of emergency is present.
• Ground or double insulate all electrical powered hand tools.
• If you see someone on a live circuit, do not touch them. Instead, disconnect system power and call for help.
• When you work with test equipment on energized systems, always use the "one-hand" method. Operate with
your right hand and place your left hand in your waistband or pocket to prevent a circuit across your heart that
could result in cardiac arrest.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Lock Out Tag Out (LOTO)


DO NOT perform or direct others to perform any work when you are unsure of the safety procedures to be followed,
the condition of the equipment, or are aware of any potential hazards.
GEMS has established a program of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to
ensure that machines or equipment are isolated from energy sources and rendered inoperative before any
employee performs any service or maintenance where the unexpected energizing, start up, or release of stored
energy could occur and cause injury.
GEMS has provided equipment to properly isolate a piece of equipment or system:
Master Lock Padlock -- 46-194427P320 Multiple Locking Device -- 46-194427P313
ECPL Tags -- 46-194427P322 Power Cord Plug Cover -- 46-19442P321
Lockout/Tagout is essential for employee safety. Know that the barriers to following proper ECPL (Energy Control
and Power Lockout) procedures and know how to overcome the barriers. Each Field Service Engineer has the
responsibility and the authority to apply ECPL procedures correctly and will be held accountable for the correct
application. When servicing/installing equipment, always:
• Notify affected employees in the area that ECPL is being performed.
• Perform orderly shutdown of the equipment.
• Physically locate and operate energy isolating devices needed to control the energy to the equipment to
ensure isolating the equipment from the energy source.
• Affix lockout devices to each energy isolating device.
• Be conscious of stored energies, capacitors, springs, and potential energy stored by gravity, thermal energy,
etc. Before starting work, neutralize stored energy.
• Verify that all energy has been disconnected.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Parts Lists

Phantoms and Service Tools

PM Parts (slip ring brushes, filters and grease)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

Phantoms and Service Tools


CCR Adjustment Body Phantom 8780058 Parts Lists

CCR Adjustment Head Phantom 8780066


Wire phantom (delivered with scanner) 7206089
Slice thickness phantom (delivered with scanner) 7206121
20 cm Water phantom (delivered with scanner) 7206014
Phantom holder (delivered with scanner) 8155012
Low contrast Phantom 9660663
Holder for low contrast Phantom 7206006
HV Adapter 9900671
Dummy Plugs 9900689
Detector Diaphragm Two sided Adjustment Pin 8785099
Detector Diaphragm 2 mm Adjustment Rod 7104508
Dial Gauge (Holder: 1648489 5212840
Tube & Detector Lift Device 2792146
Metric wrenches and Feeler Gauge
Fork Wrenches (27, 32, 36, 41 mm)
½ inch water hose and clamp
Torque Wrenches (3-20 Nm and 25-130 Nm)

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Reference Materials

UNIX commands
ls list the contents of the current directory
ls -al list, sort, detail all content, even hidden files
rm filename delete this file
cp file1 file2 copy the contents of file1 to file2
mv file directory-name move "filename" to the directory "directory-name"
mv old-filename new-filename change the name of "old-filename" to "new-filename".
mkdir directory-name create a subdirectory "directory-name" in your current working directory.
rmdir remove a directory
cd directory-name change to this directory
pwd list the path to the directory in which you are located
lpq list the jobs in the printing spool
more filename view this file one screen at a time, Return/Enter - to display one more line
space bar - to display one more page, q - to quit
clear Clears the screen.
date Gives the current time and date.
nohup Allows jobs to keep running after logging out.
ps Shows processes and their process-id.
kill [processid] Removes processes.
who Displays who is logged on the computer.

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials
GE Medical Systems Siemens Plus 4 Feedback to Author

Feedback

If you have comments or suggestions, please email them to:

EPST.feedback@med.ge.com

Alignment Component Error Functional Logic/Block Preventive Software Theory Trouble- Reference Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Materials

You might also like